WO2009003999A2 - Chemical compounds - Google Patents

Chemical compounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009003999A2
WO2009003999A2 PCT/EP2008/058433 EP2008058433W WO2009003999A2 WO 2009003999 A2 WO2009003999 A2 WO 2009003999A2 EP 2008058433 W EP2008058433 W EP 2008058433W WO 2009003999 A2 WO2009003999 A2 WO 2009003999A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
iii
membered
group
alkyl
mmol
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2008/058433
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2009003999A3 (en
Inventor
Ioannis Sapountzis
Peter Ettmayer
Christian Klein
Andreas Mantoulidis
Steffen Steurer
Irene Waizenegger
Original Assignee
Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=38792475&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=WO2009003999(A2) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Priority to US12/665,769 priority Critical patent/US8889665B2/en
Priority to CA002692383A priority patent/CA2692383A1/en
Priority to MX2009013935A priority patent/MX2009013935A/en
Priority to CN200880105329A priority patent/CN101796045A/en
Priority to BRPI0814601A priority patent/BRPI0814601A2/en
Priority to JP2010513966A priority patent/JP5511658B2/en
Priority to EP08774579.0A priority patent/EP2173734B1/en
Application filed by Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh filed Critical Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh
Priority to AU2008270300A priority patent/AU2008270300A1/en
Priority to EA201000105A priority patent/EA201000105A1/en
Publication of WO2009003999A2 publication Critical patent/WO2009003999A2/en
Publication of WO2009003999A3 publication Critical patent/WO2009003999A3/en
Priority to IL202625A priority patent/IL202625A0/en
Priority to MA32465A priority patent/MA32120B1/en
Priority to TNP2009000551A priority patent/TN2009000551A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/08—Bridged systems

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to new compounds of general formula (1)
  • Phenyl-substituted, nitrogen-containing five-ring heteroaryls for inhibiting cytokine production and hence for treating inflammatory diseases are described in WO 2004/050642, WO 2005/056535, WO 2005/090333, WO 2005/115991 and US 2006/0100204.
  • the aim of the present invention is to discover new active substances which can be used for the prevention and/or treatment of diseases characterised by excessive or abnormal cell proliferation.
  • R 1 denotes a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s), each independently selected from among R a and R b ;
  • R 2 has the partial structure (i) or (ii)
  • R 3 is selected from among hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO 2 , -NR h R h , -OR h , -C(O)R h , -C(O)NR h R h , -SR h , -S(O)R ⁇ -S(O) 2 R h , C M alkyl, C M haloalkyl, C 3 - 7 cycloalkyl and 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from among C 1-6 alkyl, -OCi- ⁇ alkyl, Ci- ⁇ haloalkyl, -OCi- ⁇ haloalkyl,
  • R 9 is selected from among hydrogen and Ci_6alkyl
  • R 10 is selected from among R a and -OR a , or the group -NR 9 R 10 in all denotes a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b ;
  • R 11 , R 12 and R 13 each independently of one another correspond to a group R a , or
  • R 11 corresponds to a group R a and the group -NR 12 R 13 together denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , or R 11 and R 12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , and R 13 corresponds to a group R a ;
  • R 14 , R 15 and R 16 each independently of one another correspond to a group R a , or
  • R 14 corresponds to a group R a and the group NR 15 R 16 together denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , and R 16 corresponds to a group R a ;
  • R 17 , R 18 and R 19 each independently of one another correspond to a group R a , or
  • R 17 and R 18 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b
  • R 19 corresponds to a group R a
  • R 18 corresponds to a group R a , or
  • R 18 and R 19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , and R 17 corresponds to a group R a ;
  • L is selected from among -C(O)NH-, -NHC(O)-, -C(S)NH-, -NHC(S)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -NH-, -S(O)- -S(O)O-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 O-, -S(O)NH-, -S(O) 2 NH-, -OS(O)- -OS(O) 2 -, -OS(O)NH-, -OS(O) 2 NH-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)S-, -C(NH)NH-, -OC(O)-, -OC(O)O-, -OC(O)NH-, -SC(O)- -SC(O)O-, -SC(O)NH-, -NHC(NH)- -NHS(O)-, -NHS
  • R 1 denotes a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s), each independently selected from among R a and R b ;
  • R 2 has the partial structure (i) or (ii)
  • R 3 is selected from among hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO 2 , -NR h R h , -OR h , -C(O)R h , -C(O)NR h R h , -SR h , -S(O)R h , -S(O) 2 R h , d_ 4 alkyl, Ci_ 4 haloalkyl, C 3 - 7 cycloalkyl and 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from among -OCi_ 6 alkyl, Ci- ⁇ haloalkyl, -OCi- ⁇ haloalkyl, C3_ 7 cycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, all the above-mentioned groups optionally being substituted by Ci_ 6 alkyl, -CN or -OH; a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R 6 , R 7 or R and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R 6 or R 7 has one of the partial structures (iii) to (vi)
  • V (v) (vi) and in case a) the other two groups in each case independently of one another and in case b) the second group is/are selected from among hydrogen, Ci_ 6 alkyl, -OCi_ 6 alkyl, -OH, -CN, -NHCi_ 6 alkyl, -N(Ci_ 6 alkyl) 2 and halogen;
  • R 9 is selected from among hydrogen and Ci_6alkyl
  • R 10 is selected from among R a and -OR a , or the group -NR 9 R 10 altogether denotes a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b
  • R 11 , R 12 and R 13 each independently of one another correspond to a group R a , or
  • R 11 corresponds to a group R a and the group -NR 12 R 13 altogether denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , or
  • R 11 and R 12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , and R 13 corresponds to a group R a ;
  • R 14 , R 15 and R 16 each independently of one another correspond to a group R a , or
  • R 14 corresponds to a group R a and the group NR 15 R 16 altogether denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , and R 16 corresponds to a group R a ;
  • R 17 , R 18 and R 19 each independently of one another correspond to a group R a , or
  • R 17 and R 18 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b
  • R 19 corresponds to a group R a
  • R 18 corresponds to a group R a , or
  • R 18 and R 19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among R a and R b , and R 17 corresponds to a group R a ;
  • L is selected from among -C(O)NH-, -NHC(O)-, -C(S)NH-, -NHC(S)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -NH-, -S(O)-, -S(O)O-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 O-, -S(O)NH-, -S(O) 2 NH-, -OS(O)-, -OS(O) 2 -, -OS(O)NH-, -OS(O) 2 NH-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)S-, -C(NH)NH-, -OC(O)-, -OC(O)O-, -OC(O)NH-, -SC(O)-, -SC(O)O-, -SC(O)NH-, -NHC(NH)- -NHS(O)-,
  • each R b denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -OR C , -SR C , -NR C R C , -ONR C R C , -N(OR C )R C , -NR g NR c R c , halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO 2 , -N 3 ,-C(O)R C , -C(O)OR C , -C(O)NR C R C , -C(O)SR C , -C(0)NR g NR c R c , -C(
  • R 1 denotes a heteroaryl selected from among pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R 1 is mono- or polysubstituted by identical or different groups and the group(s) is/are each independently selected from among Ci_ 6 alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci- ⁇ haloalkyl, C3-iocycloalkyl, C ⁇ i ⁇ cycloalkylalkyl, C ⁇ -ioaryl, C 7-1 6aiylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl, -OH, -OCi_ 6 alkyl, -NH 2 , -NHCi_ 6 alkyl, -NHCs-iocycloalkyl, -N(Ci_ 6 alkyl) 2 , -NHC(O)Ci_ 6 alkyl, -NHC(O)OCi_ 6 alkyl,
  • the invention in another aspect (A3) relates to compounds (1), wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R 6 , R 7 or R 8 and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R 6 or R 7 has one of the partial structures (iii-a) to (iii-h)
  • R 9 and R 10 are as hereinbefore defined.
  • the invention in another aspect (A4) relates to compounds (1), wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R 6 , R 7 or R 8 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b) or (iii-c), or one of the groups R »6 or r R,7 has the partial structure (iii-d), or R 7 has the partial structure (iii-e), ( ⁇ i-f), ( ⁇ i-g) or (iii-h); and b) where partial structure (ii) is present R 7 has the partial structure (iii-a).
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L denotes-NHC(O)-.
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L denotes-C(O)NH-; the partial structure (i) is present and one of the groups R 6 , R 7 or R 8 has the partial structure (iii-a) or
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present
  • R 7 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), ( ⁇ i-f), ( ⁇ i-g) or (iii-h),
  • R 6 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), ( ⁇ i-g) or (iii-h) and
  • R 7 and R 8 denote hydrogen
  • R 8 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), ( ⁇ i-g) or (iii-h) and R 6 and R 7 denote hydrogen; and b) where partial structure (ii) is present
  • R 7 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), ( ⁇ i-g) or (iii-h) and R 6 denotes hydrogen.
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein the partial structure (i) is present and R 7 has the partial structure (iv).
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L denotes-NHC(O)-.
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R 6 and R 8 each denote hydrogen.
  • the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R 10 and R 13 are each independently of one another selected from among R al and -OCi_ 6 alkyl;
  • R 10 and R 13 are selected independently in each case from among methyl; ethyl; allyl; 2-propyl; 2-hydroxyethyl; 2-aminoethyl; 2-methoxyethyl; 2,2-dimethoxyethyl; 2,3-dihydroxypropyl; 2-methylpropyl; cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl; 1,1-dimethylethyl; methoxy; 2,2-dimethylpropyl;
  • R 13 denotes d_ 6 alkyl
  • R 11 and R 12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a heterocycloalkyl, selected from among
  • the invention relates to compounds - or the pharmacologically acceptable salts - of general formula (1) as medicaments.
  • the invention relates to pharmaceutical preparations, containing as active substance one or more compounds of general formula (1) or the pharmacologically acceptable salts thereof, optionally in combination with conventional excipients and/or carriers.
  • the invention relates to the use of compounds of general formula (1) for preparing a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment and/or prevention of cancer, infections, inflammations and autoimmune diseases.
  • the invention in another aspect relates to a pharmaceutical preparation comprising a compound of general formula (1), while the compounds (1) are optionally also in the form of the tautomers, the racemates, the enantiomers, the diastereomers, the mixtures thereof, the polymorphs thereof or as pharmacologically acceptable salts of all the above- mentioned forms, and at least one other cytostatic or cytotoxic active substance different from formula (1).
  • heteroalkyl refers to the total number of atoms in all the ring members or chain members or the total of all the ring members and chain members.
  • Alkyl is made up of the sub-groups saturated hydrocarbon chains and unsaturated hydrocarbon chains, while the latter may be further subdivided into hydrocarbon chains with a double bond (alkenyl) and hydrocarbon chains with a triple bond (alkynyl).
  • Alkenyl contains at least one double bond, alkynyl at least one triple bond. If a hydrocarbon chain should have both at least one double bond and at least one triple bond, by definition it belongs to the alkynyl sub-group. All the above-mentioned sub-groups may be further subdivided into straight-chain (unbranched) and branched. If an alkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or polysubstituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms.
  • -butyl (1.1 -dimethylethyl); n-pentyl; 1-methylbutyl; 1-ethylpropyl; isopentyl (3-methylbutyl); neopentyl (2,2-dimethyl-propyl); n-hexyl; 2,3-dimethylbutyl; 2,2-dimethylbutyl; 3,3-dimethylbutyl; 2-methyl-pentyl; 3-methylpentyl; n-heptyl; 2-methylhexyl; 3-methylhexyl; 2,2-dimethylpentyl; 2,3-dimethylpentyl; 2,4-dimethylpentyl; 3,3-dimethylpentyl; 2,2,3-trimethylbutyl; 3-ethylpentyl; n-octyl; n-nonyl; n-decyl etc.
  • butadienyl pentadienyl, hexadienyl, heptadienyl, octadienyl, nonadienyl, decadienyl etc. unless otherwise stated are meant unsaturated hydrocarbon groups with the corresponding number of carbon atoms and two double bonds, including all the isomeric forms, also (Z)/(iT)-isomers, where applicable.
  • propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, heptynyl, octynyl, nonynyl, decynyl etc. unless otherwise stated are meant unsaturated hydrocarbon groups with the corresponding number of carbon atoms and a triple bond, including all the isomeric forms.
  • heteroalkyl groups which are derived from the alkyl as herein- before defined in its widest sense by replacing, in the hydrocarbon chains, one or more of the groups -CH 3 independently of one another by the groups -OH, -SH or -NH 2 , one or more of the groups -CH 2 - independently of one another by the groups -O-, -S- or -NH- , one or more of the groups
  • heteroalkyl is made up of the sub-groups saturated hydrocarbon chains with heteroatom(s), heteroalkenyl and heteroalkynyl, and it may be further subdivided into straight-chain (unbranched) and branched. If a heteroalkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or polysubstituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying oxygen, sulphur, nitrogen and/or carbon atoms. Heteroalkyl itself as a substituent may be attached to the molecule both through a carbon atom and through a heteroatom.
  • dimethylamino methyl dimethylaminoethyl (1- dimethylaminoethyl; 2-dimethyl- aminoethyl); dimethylaminopropyl (1-dimethylaminopropyl, 2-dimethylaminopropyl, 3-dimethylaminopropyl); diethylaminomethyl; diethylaminoethyl (1-diethylamino ethyl, 2-diethylamino ethyl); diethylaminopropyl (1-diethylaminopropyl, 2- diethylamino -propyl, 3 -diethylaminopropyl); diisopropylaminoethyl (1-diisopropylaminoethyl, 2-di- isopropylaminoethyl); bis-2-methoxyethylamino; [2-(dimethylamino-ethyl)
  • Haloalkyl is derived from alkyl as hereinbefore defined in its broadest sense, by replacing one or more hydrogen atoms of the hydrocarbon chain independently of one another by halogen atoms, which may be identical or different.
  • a direct result of the indirect definition/derivation from alkyl is that haloalkyl is made up of the sub-groups saturated hydrohalogen chains, haloalkenyl and haloalkynyl, and it may be further subdivided into straight-chain (unbranched) and branched. If a haloalkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or polysubstituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms. Typical examples are listed below:
  • Halogen encompasses fluorine, chlorine, bromine and/or iodine atoms.
  • Cycloalkyl is made up of the sub-groups monocyclic hydrocarbon rings, bicyclic hydrocarbon rings and spirohydrocarbon rings, while each sub-group may be further subdivided into saturated and unsaturated (cycloalkenyl).
  • unsaturated is meant that there is at least one double bond in the ring system, but no aromatic system is formed.
  • bicyclic hydrocarbon rings two rings are linked such that they share at least two carbon atoms.
  • spirohydrocarbon rings one carbon atom (spiroatom) is shared by two rings. If a cycloalkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or poly substituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms.
  • Cycloalkyl itself as a substituent may be attached to the molecule through any suitable position of the ring system.
  • the following individual sub-groups are listed by way of example: monocyclic hydrocarbon rings, saturated: cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl; cyclohexyl; cycloheptyl etc.
  • bicyclic hydrocarbon rings saturated and unsaturated: bicyclo[2.2.0]hexyl; bicyclo[3.2.0]heptyl; bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl; bicyclo[4.3.0]nonyl (octahydroindenyl); bicyclo[4.4.0]decyl (decahydronaphthalene); bicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl (norbornyl); (bicyclo[2.2.1]hepta-2,5-dienyl (norborna-2,5-dienyl); bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-enyl (norbornenyl); bicyclo[4.1.0]heptyl (norcaranyl); bicyclo- [3.1.1]heptyl (pinanyl) etc.
  • spirohydrocarbon rings saturated and unsaturated: spiro[2.5]octyl, spiro[3.3]heptyl, spiro[4.5]dec-2-ene, etc.
  • Cycloalkylalkyl denotes the combination of the alkyl and cycloalkyl groups defined hereinbefore, in each case in their broadest sense.
  • the alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by a cycloalkyl group.
  • the linking of alkyl and cycloalkyl in both groups may be effected by means of any suitable carbon atoms.
  • the sub-groups of alkyl and cycloalkyl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
  • Aryl denotes mono-, bi- or tricyclic carbon rings with at least one aromatic ring. If an aryl is substituted, the substitution may be mono- or polysubstitution in each case, at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms, independently of one another.
  • Aryl itself may be linked to the molecule as substituent via any suitable position of the ring system. Typical examples are listed below: phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl (2,3-dihydroindenyl), 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl; fluorenyl, etc.
  • Arylalkyl denotes the combination of the groups alkyl and aryl as hereinbefore defined, in each case in their broadest sense.
  • the alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by an aryl group.
  • the alkyl and aryl may be linked in both groups via any carbon atoms suitable for this purpose.
  • the respective sub-groups of alkyl and aryl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
  • Typical examples are listed below: benzyl; 1-phenylethyl; 2-phenylethyl; phenylvinyl; phenylallyl etc.
  • Heteroaryl denotes monocyclic aromatic rings or polycyclic rings with at least one aromatic ring, which, compared with corresponding aryl or cycloalkyl, contain instead of one or more carbon atoms one or more identical or different heteroatoms, selected independently of one another from among nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen, while the resulting group must be chemically stable. If a heteroaryl is substituted, the substitution may be mono- or polysubstitution in each case, at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon and/or nitrogen atoms, independently of one another. Heteroaryl itself as substituent may be linked to the molecule via any suitable position of the ring system, both carbon and nitrogen. Typical examples are listed below.
  • polycyclic heteroaryls indolyl; isoindolyl; benzofuryl; benzothienyl; benzoxazolyl; benzothiazolyl; benzisoxazolyl; benzisothiazolyl; benzimidazolyl; indazolyl; isoquinolinyl; quinolinyl; quinoxalinyl; cinnolinyl; phthalazinyl; quinazolinyl; benzotriazinyl; indolizinyl; oxazolopyridyl; imidazopyridyl; naphthyridinyl; indolinyl; isochromanyl; chromanyl; tetrahydroisoquinolinyl; isoindolinyl; isobenzotetrahydrofuryl; isobenzotetrahydrothienyl; isobenzothienyl; benzoxazolyl; pyrid
  • Heteroarylalkyl denotes the combination of the alkyl and heteroaryl groups defined hereinbefore, in each case in their broadest sense.
  • the alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by a heteroaryl group.
  • the linking of the alkyl and heteroaryl may be achieved on the alkyl side via any carbon atoms suitable for this purpose and on the heteroaryl side by any carbon or nitrogen atoms suitable for this purpose.
  • the respective sub-groups of alkyl and heteroaryl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
  • Heteroatoms may simultaneously be present in all the possible oxidation stages (sulphur -> sulphoxide -SO-, sulphone -SO 2 -; nitrogen - ⁇ N-oxide). It is immediately apparent from the indirect definition/derivation from cycloalkyl that heterocycloalkyl is made up of the sub-groups monocyclic hetero-rings, bicyclic hetero-rings and spirohetero-rings, while each sub-group can also be further subdivided into saturated and unsaturated (heterocycloalkenyl).
  • unsaturated means that in the ring system in question there is at least one double bond, but no aromatic system is formed.
  • bicyclic hetero-rings two rings are linked such that they have at least two atoms in common.
  • one carbon atom spiroatom
  • the substitution may be mono- or poly- substitution in each case, at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon and/or nitrogen atoms, independently of one another.
  • Heterocycloalkyl itself as substituent may be linked to the molecule via any suitable position of the ring system. Typical examples of individual sub-groups are listed below.
  • monocyclic heterorings saturated and unsaturated: tetrahydrofuryl; pyrrolidinyl; pyrrolinyl; imidazolidinyl; thiazolidinyl; imidazolinyl; pyrazolidinyl; pyrazolinyl; piperidinyl; piperazinyl; oxiranyl; aziridinyl; azetidinyl; 1 ,4-dioxanyl; azepanyl; diazepanyl; morpholinyl; thiomorpholinyl; homornorpholinyl; homopiperidinyl; homopiperazinyl; ho mo thiomorpholinyl; thiomorpholinyl-iS-oxide; thiomorpholinyl-iS'.iS'-dioxide; 1,3-dioxolanyl; tetrahydropyranyl; tetrahydrothiopyranyl
  • bicyclic heterorings saturated and unsaturated: 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 8-azabicyclo[5.1.0]octyl; 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl; 8-oxa-3-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 3,8-diaza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 2,5-diaza-bicyclo- [2.2.1]heptyl; l-aza-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl; 3,8-diaza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 3,9-diaza- bicyclo[4.2.1]nonyl; 2,6-diaza-bicyclo[3.2.2]nonyl etc.
  • spiro -heterorings saturated and unsaturated: l,4-dioxa-spiro[4.5]decyl; l-oxa-3.8-diaza-spiro[4.5]decyl; and 2,6-diaza-spiro[3.3]heptyl; 2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonyl; 2,6-diaza-spiro[3.4]octyl; 3,9-diaza-spiro[5.5]undecyl; 2,8-diaza-spiro[4.5]decyl etc.
  • ⁇ eterocycloalkylalkyl denotes the combination of the alkyl and heterocycloalkyl groups defined hereinbefore, in each case in their broadest sense.
  • the alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by a heterocycloalkyl group.
  • the linking of the alkyl and heterocycloalkyl may be achieved on the alkyl side via any carbon atoms suitable for this purpose and on the heterocycloalkyl side by any carbon or nitrogen atoms suitable for this purpose.
  • the respective sub-groups of alkyl and heterocycloalkyl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
  • substituted is meant that a hydrogen atom that is bound directly to the atom under consideration is replaced by another atom or another group of atoms. Alternatively substitution may take place at an atom if there are free electrons available at this atom. Depending on the starting conditions (number of hydrogen atoms, number of free electrons) mono- or polysubstitution may take place at an atom. Thus, for example, a free electron pair may be substituted by two monovalent substituents.
  • substitution by a bivalent substituent may only take place at non-aromatic ring systems and requires exchange for two geminal hydrogen atoms, i.e. hydrogen atoms that are bound to the same carbon atom saturated before the substitution or for a free electron pair. Substitution by a bivalent substituent is therefore only possible at the group -CH 2 - or heteroatoms of a non-aromatic ring system.
  • suitable substituent denotes a substituent which is suitable, on the one hand, on account of its valency and on the other hand leads to a system with chemical stability.
  • Mass range 100 - 1200 m/z Fragmentor: 70
  • Gain EMV Threshold: 1 mAU; Stepsize: 2 nm; UV: 254 nm as well as 230 nm; Bandwide: 8 Injection: Standard 1 ⁇ L
  • the compounds according to the invention are prepared by the methods of synthesis described hereinafter, in which the substituents of the general formulae have the meanings given hereinbefore. These methods are intended as an illustration of the invention, without restricting its subject matter and the scope of the compounds claimed to these examples. Where the preparation of starting compounds is not described, they are commercially obtainable or may be prepared analogously to known compounds or methods described herein. Substances described in the literature are prepared according to the published methods of synthesis. Compounds depicted in reaction schemes A to O can also be isolated in form of their salts and used as such . Such salts [e.g. halides, sulfonates (e.g. tosylates), ammonium salts etc.] are obtained whenever the free base or the free acid form is reacted with an appropriate acid or base, respectively.
  • Such salts e.g. halides, sulfonates (e.g. tosylates), ammonium salts etc.
  • the benzoic acids A-2 are obtained by methods known in the literature by diazotising 3-aminobenzoic acids Z-I in hydrochloric NaNO 2 solution and reacting with sodium azide to form the aromatic azides A-I.
  • the cycloaddition (for inserting the group R 1 ) of the azides A-I is carried out using methods known from the literature using a corresponding alkyne Z-3, CuSO 4 and sodium ascorbate and A-2 is obtained.
  • the alkynes Z-3 used to introduce the groups R 1 are either commercially obtainable or are prepared from aldehydes Z-2 that are commercially obtainable or synthesised using methods known from the literature, e.g. by means of the Bestmann-Ohira reagent. Moreover, the alkynes used may also be prepared from aryl bromides and iodides and trimethylsilylacetylene which are commercially obtainable or synthesised by methods known from the literature by means of a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling (Sonogashira) and subsequent cleaving of the silyl protecting group.
  • a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling Nonogashira
  • the groups R 1 of directly accessible benzoic acids A-2 which consist of a halogen- or amino-substituted heteroaryl, may be converted by reactions of substitution (at the heteroaryl itself), alkylation, acylation or addition (at the amino group of the heteroaryl).
  • transition metal-catalysed cross-coupling reactions Ullmann, Buchwald-Hartwig, Sonogashira etc.
  • R 1 may be carried out on heteroarylbromides in R 1 in order to introduce various substituents.
  • azides A-I can be obtained from 3-iodo-benzoic acids by reaction with sodium azide NaN 3 , L-proline, an appropriate base (such as Na 2 CO 3 ) in the presence of a Cu(I) source (such as CuI or CuSO 4 ) and a reducing agent (such as sodium ascorbate) in DMSO.
  • a Cu(I) source such as CuI or CuSO 4
  • a reducing agent such as sodium ascorbate
  • 3-ethynylpyridine Z-3b (956 mg, 9.27 mmol) and azide A-Ia (1.64 g, 9.27 mmol) are taken up in 35 mL EtOH and 20 mL acetonitrile. Then 11.12 mL of sodium ascorbate solution (1.0 M, 11.12 mmol) and 18.53 mL CuSO 4 -sln. (0.1 M, 1.85 mmol) are added and the mixture is stirred for 3 d at RT. For working up the mixture is evaporated down under reduced pressure, mixed with water and adjusted to an acid pH (pH ⁇ 5) by the addition of 1 N hydrochloric acid solution. The precipitate formed is filtered off, washed with a little acetonitrile and dried in the vacuum dryer.
  • TMS-protected alkyne Z-3c (1.98 g, 7.62 mmol) is taken up in MeOH (110 mL), combined with K 2 CO 3 (1.75 g, 12.6 mmol) and stirred for 2 h at RT.
  • Azide A-Ia (953 mg, 5.38 mmol), sodium ascorbate solution (1.0 M, 6.0 mL) and CuSO 4 solution (0.1 M, 5.1 mL) are added successively and the mixture is stirred for 5 d at RT.
  • the reaction mixture is evaporated down, diluted with water and the pH is adjusted with 1 N hydrochloric acid to pH 5.
  • benzoic acids A-2 are obtained from the corresponding A-I or Z-I and Z-3 intermediates/educts.
  • the benzoic acids A-2 described are used in all the following reaction sequences (Schemes B to J) as synthesis components and in each case are coupled with anilines.
  • These amide couplings are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of common coupling reagents, such as HATU or TBTU, for example, or the benzoic acids A-2 are activated using thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride or Ghosez reagent using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding acid chloride and are then reacted with the respective anilines (R 2 -NH 2 ). Reaction procedures by way of example are described therein.
  • 3-azidobenzoic acids A-I may also be coupled to the respective aniline (insertion of R 2 ) and only then is the cycloaddition carried out (and optionally modification in R 1 ) as shown in Scheme A.
  • Example compounds of type I (benzylethers or benzylamines in the m-position relative to the amide link -> R 7 ) are prepared from benzylalcohols B-3 either by substitution of the corresponding benzyl chloride by means of an amine/hydroxylamine R 9 R 10 NH (type Ia -> benzylamine) or aminoalcohol R 9 R 10 N(CH2) y OH (or alkoxide, type Ib - ⁇ benzyl-ether) or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R 9 R 10 NH (type Ia -> benzylamine).
  • the benzyl alcohols B-3 are reacted for this purpose by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding benzyl chloride.
  • the benzylalcohols B-3 may be oxidised e.g. with MnO 2 , Dess-Martin-Periodinane or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in acetic acid medium with Na(OAc) 3 BH or Na(CN)BH 3 and an amine R 9 R 10 NH using methods known from the literature to obtain compounds of type Ia.
  • the amines/hydroxylamines/aminoalcohols used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • the benzylalcohols B-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines B-2 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described above.
  • the anilines B-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding carbonyl compounds B-I by nitrogenation, e.g. with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, cone, nitric acid, fuming nitric acid or nitrating acid and subsequent reductions with e.g. Pd/C and hydrogen in THF, methanol or ethanol or Fe and ammonium chloride in ethanol via various intermediate products Z.
  • EMa Z-4a Z-5a B-2a 2-hydroxy-5-ter£-butylbenzaldehyde B-Ia (9.0 g, 50.5 mmol) is taken up in acetonitrile (400 mL), cooled to -30 0 C, mixed batchwise with NO 2 BF 4 and stirred for 30 min. Then the reaction mixture is allowed to warm up to -15 0 C within 1 h and stirred for a further 30 min at this temperature. The reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase is washed with sat. NaHC ⁇ 3 solution and sat. NaCl solution.
  • Benzylalcohol B-3a (85 mg, 0.17 mmol) and MnO 2 (168 mg, 1.7 mmol) are taken up in 2 mL chlorobenzene and heated to 60 0 C for 3 h. Then the mixture is left to cool to RT, filtered through Celite and the filtrate is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 3 mL DCM, combined with pyrrolidine (48 ⁇ L, 0.59 mmol) and stirred for 15 min. Then glacial acetic acid (34 ⁇ L, 0.59 mmol) is added and Na(AcO)sBH (124.1 mg, 0.586 mmol) is added batchwise.
  • Example compounds of type Ia (benzylamine in the w-position to the amide link -> R 7 ) can also be prepared by a different sequence of the reaction steps shown in reaction scheme B-I (-> reaction scheme B-II), by first synthesising the anilinic benzylamines B-5 using methods known from the literature from the nitro compounds B-4 by reducing the two functional groups, protecting the amino function (e.g. by means of the Boc protective group), activating the benzyl alcohol (for example to obtain the chloride or mesylate) and reacting the benzyl alcohol thus activated with secondary amines and then reacting with the components A-2 by standard amide linking methods to form the end compounds Ia.
  • reaction scheme B-II -> reaction scheme B-II
  • Example compound Ib-I is synthesised by treating the corresponding benzylalcohol B-3 analogously to the method for synthesising Ia-I (benzyl chloride route, see above) with thionyl chloride and instead of pyrrolidine adding sodium-2-dimethylaminoethoxide as nucleophil.
  • Reaction scheme C
  • Example compounds of type II (benzylethers or benzylamines in the p -position to the amide link ⁇ R 6 ) are prepared from benzylalcohols C-3 either by substitution of the corresponding benzyl chloride by means of an amine/hydroxylamine R 9 R 10 NH (type Ha ⁇ benzylamine) or aminoalcohol R 9 R 10 N(CH2) y OH (or alkoxide, type Hb ⁇ benzylether) or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R 9 R 10 NH (type Hb -> benzylether).
  • the benzyl alcohols C-3 are reacted by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to form the corresponding benzyl chloride.
  • the benzylalcohols C-3 may be oxidised e.g. with MnO 2 , Dess- Martin-Periodinane or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in an acetic acid medium with Na(OAc) 3 BH or Na(CN)BH 3 and an amine R 9 R 10 NH using methods known from the literature to obtain compounds of type Ha.
  • the amines/hydroxylamines/aminoalcohols used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • the benzylalcohols C-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines C-2 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described hereinbefore.
  • the anilines C-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding carbonyl compounds C-I by nitrogenation, e.g. with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, cone, nitric acid, fuming nitric acid or nitrating acid and subsequent reductions with e.g. Pd/C and hydrogen in THF, methanol or ethanol or Fe and ammonium chloride in ethanol via various intermediate products Z.
  • nitrogenated educts Z- 7 are available from commercial sources (cf. synthesis of C-2a).
  • Other intermediate steps may also be integrated into the reaction sequence for synthesising the amines C-2, such as the modification of another functional group in the substituents R 7 and/or R 8 .
  • Benzoic acid A-2a (1.0 g, 3.36 mmol) is taken up in thionyl chloride (10 mL, 84 mmol), heated to 65 0 C and stirred for 3 h. Then thionyl chloride is eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the reaction mixture is twice azeotroped with toluene.
  • Example Ha-I Analogously to the reaction methods a) to c) described above for synthesising Example Ha-I the following Examples Ha-2 to Ha-24 (Table 2) or comparable further Examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
  • D-1-1 Example compounds of type III (arylamine in the m-position to the amide link -> R 7 ) are prepared from arylbromides D-3 either by a palladium- (Buchwald-Hartwig) or copper (Ullmann)-catalysed cross-coupling reaction with an amine or a nitrogen compound of general formula R 9 R 10 NH.
  • the palladium- catalysed cross-couplings of D-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of common catalysts, such as for example biphenyl-2-yl-di-terr-butylphosphane and tris-(dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium, as well as a base, such as e.g.
  • the arylbromides D-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines D-2 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described above.
  • the anilines D-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding bromides D-l-1 or D-l-2 or also iodides, by nitrogenation, e.g. with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, cone, nitric acid, fuming nitric acid or nitrating acid and subsequent reductions with e.g. Pd/C and hydrogen in THF, methanol or ethanol or Fe and ammonium chloride in ethanol via various intermediate products Z. In some cases, already nitrogenated educts Z-9 are available from commercial sources. Other intermediate steps may also be integrated into the reaction sequence for synthesising the amines D-2, such as the modification of another functional group in the substituents R 6 and/or R 8 .
  • D-I-Ia (4.9 g, 18.9 mmol) is taken up in cone, sulphuric acid (20 mL), cooled to 0 0 C and combined with an ice-cold mixture of cone, nitric acid (25 mL) and cone, sulphuric acid (20 mL). After 3 h stirring at RT the reaction mixture is poured onto ice water, extracted with EtOAc, the organic phase is washed with sat. NaHCO 3 solution and sat.
  • Benzoic acid A-2b (2.56 g, 9.16 mmol) is taken up in 45 mL DCM and 5 mL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.92 mL, 10.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 1 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 45 mL DCM and 15 mL THF and combined with the aniline D-2c (2.2 g, 9.16 mmol) as well as DIPEA (2.29 mL, 15.6 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator.
  • Arylbromide D-3b (50 mg, 0.096 mmol), sodium carbonate (43.7 mg, 0.4 mmol), L-proline (4.6 mg, 0.04 mmol) and copper(I)-iodide (3.8 mg, 0.02 mmol) are taken up in 900 ⁇ L DMSO under an argon atmosphere and combined with 4-methylimidazole (33 mg, 0.4 mmol).
  • the reaction mixture is heated to 150 0 C using a microwave reactor and stirred for 90 min. Then the reaction mixture is filtered and the reaction mixture is purified by preparative HPLC.
  • Example compounds of type III can also be prepared by a different sequence of the reaction steps shown in reaction scheme D-I (-> reaction scheme D-II), by first synthesising the anilines D-4 using methods known from the literature from the anilines D-2 by protecting the amino function (e.g. by means of the Boc protective group), followed by palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction (Buchwald-Hartwig reaction) and cleaving the Boc-protective group (e.g. with TFA or HCl) and then reacting with the components A-2 by standard amide linking methods to form the end compounds III.
  • Boc protective group palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction
  • Boc-protective group e.g. with TFA or HCl
  • the catalyst is filtered off, the filtrate is evaporated down, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and washed with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid.
  • the organic phase is dried on MgSO 4 , filtered and evaporated down.
  • the crude product thus obtained (15.8 g, 30.8 mmol) is taken up in DCM (250 mL), combined dropwise with TFA (68.6 mL) and stirred for 2 h at RT. Then the reaction mixture is extracted 2x with 200 mL water.
  • the combined aqueous phases are extracted with DCM, adjusted to pH 8 with NaOH and extracted 3x with EtOAc.
  • the combined organic phases are dried on MgSO 4 , filtered and evaporated down.
  • Example compounds of type IV (arylamines in the p-position to the amide link ⁇ R 6 ) and type V (arylamines in the o-position to the amide link -> R 8 ) are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines E-2 or E-4 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described above.
  • the anilines E-2 or E-4 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding fluoronitroaromatic compounds E-I or E-3 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an amine R 9 R 10 NH and subsequent reduction via the intermediate products Z-IO or Z-Il.
  • the nucleophilic aromatic substitutions at E-I and E-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as for example NMP, DMSO or DMF.
  • the amines R 9 R 10 NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • reaction conditions for the nucleophilic substitution and reduction are essentially independent of whether the starting material is an educt E-I (4-fluoronitrobenzene) or E-3 (2-fluoro-nitrobenzene). Therefore only the synthesis of E-2 and hence of examples of type IV will be described hereinafter.
  • the reaction conditions can be applied to the synthesis of E-4 and Examples of type V.
  • Example compounds of type VI (arylethers in the / ⁇ -position to the amide link -> R 6 ) and type VII (arylethers in the o-position to the amide link -> R 8 ) are synthesised by a reaction of amide coupling of the anilines F-2 or F-4 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore.
  • the anilines used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding fluoronitroaromatic compounds F-I or F-3 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an aminoalcohol R 9 R 10 N(CH 2 ) y OH (or the corresponding alkoxide) and subsequent reduction via the intermediate products Z-12 and Z-13.
  • the nucleophilic aromatic substitutions at F-I and F-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF, using a base such as NaH or K 2 CO 3 .
  • the aminoalcohols R 9 R 10 N(CH 2 ) y OH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • the reaction conditions for the nucleophilic substitution and reduction are essentially dependent on whether the starting material is an educt F-I (4-fluoronitrobenzene) or F-3 (2-fluoro-nitrobenzene). Therefore, only the synthesis of F-4 and hence of examples of type VII will be described hereinafter by way of example.
  • the reaction conditions can be applied to the synthesis of F-2 and Examples of type VI.
  • Example compounds of type VIII are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the aniline G-2 and the corresponding, benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore.
  • the anilines G-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding nitrophenols G-I by nucleophilic substitution at an aminoalkylhalide R 9 R 10 N(CH 2 ) y X and subsequent reduction via the intermediate product Z-14.
  • the aminoalkylhalides R 9 R 10 N(CH2) y X used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • the corresponding aldehydes Z-16 are obtained for example by ozonolysis of allylarylethers G-4 in methanolic medium, the reductive amination is carried out in acetic acid medium with Na(OAc) 3 BH or Na(CN)BH 3 using methods known from the literature.
  • the amines R 9 R 10 NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • Allylarylethers G-4 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the aniline G-3 with the corresponding benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore, while aniline G-3 may be obtained by allylation of the nitrophenols G-I and subsequent reduction via the intermediate product Z-15.
  • the nucleophilic substitution to obtain the intermediate products Z-14 and Z-15 is carried out using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF, using a base such as e.g. caesium carbonate, NaH or K 2 CO 3 .
  • Example compounds VIII may be synthesised analogously to this procedure from the corresponding G-2 and A-2 intermediates/educts.
  • Benzoic acid A-2a (1.5 g, 5.1 mmol) is taken up in 32 mL DCM and 10 mL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.49 mL, 5.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 3 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 15 mL THF, cooled to 0 0 C in the ice bath and combined with the aniline G-3a (1.21 g, 5.5 mmol) as well as DIPEA (2.6 mL, 15.1 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the residue is taken up in EtOAc.
  • allylarylethers G-4 may be synthesised from the corresponding G-3 and A-2 intermediates/educts.
  • Example compounds of type IX (amidines in the m-position to the amide link -> R 7 ) are synthesised from the anilines H-2 by amidine formation with the corresponding amide.
  • the amides used are activated using methods known from the literature with acid chlorides, such as e.g. phosphoryl chloride or oxalyl chloride, and the reaction is carried out in ethereal solvents, such as dioxane or THF, for example. If desired the amides used may also serve as solvents.
  • the anilines H-2 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the 1,3-dianilines H-I and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described hereinbefore.
  • the dianilines used are commercially obtainable or may be synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • H-2 may be synthesised from the corresponding H-I and A-2 intermediates/educts.
  • Example compounds of type X (amines with Cy linkers in the m-position to the amide link -> R 7 ) are obtained from compounds 1-3 either by substitution of the corresponding phenylalkyl chloride by means of an amine R 9 R 10 NH or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R 9 R 10 NH.
  • the phenylalkyl- alcohols 1-3 are reacted by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding chlorides.
  • the phenylalkylalcohols 1-3 may be oxidised e.g.
  • the phenylalkylalcohols 1-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines 1-2 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore.
  • the anilines 1-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding carbonyl compounds 1-1, e.g. phenylacetic acids, by nitrogenation and subsequent reductions via various intermediate products Z.
  • anilines 1-2 may be synthesised from the corresponding 1-1 intermediates/educts.
  • Benzoic acid A-2a (680 mg, 2.29 mmol) is taken up in 4 mL DCM and 4 mL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.3 mL, 3.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 1 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in
  • Phenylalkylalcohol I-3a (226 mg, 0.467 mmol) is taken up in DCM, combined at RT with DMP (237 mg, 0.558 mmol) and stirred for 1.5 h. Then 1 g Na 2 S 2 O 3 and 1 g NaHCO 3 dissolved in 10 mL water are added to the solution and the reaction mixture is stirred for 20 min at RT. The organic phase is separated off and the aqueous phase is extracted twice more with DCM. The combined organic phases are again washed with sat. NaHCO 3 solution, dried on MgSO 4 , filtered off, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z- 19a is ob, which is further reacted directly.
  • Examples X-I to X-6 (Table 8) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors.
  • the introduction of an aminoalkyl side chain into the position of the group R 7 in reaction scheme I can theoretically also be applied to an introduction into the position of the group R 6 and R 8 if carbonyl compounds whose carbonyl functionality is in position R 6 or R 8 are used as educt, analogously to 1-1.
  • Example compounds of type XI are synthesised from the diaminopyridines J-3 by an amide coupling reaction with the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described hereinbefore.
  • the diaminopyridines J-3 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding dichloropyridines J-I by twofold nucleophilic aromatic substitution with amines R 9 R 10 NH and protected ammonia equivalents (e.g. benzylamine) via the intermediate stages Z-20 and J-2 and subsequent selective cleaving of protective groups.
  • the nucleophilic aromatic substitutions are carried out in common solvents, such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF, with a base, such as pyridine or DIPEA, for example.
  • the amines R 9 R 10 NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • J-2a J -3a 2,6-dichloro-4-trifluoromethylpyridine J-Ia (1.51 g, 6.99 mmol) is taken up in 1 mL pyridine, combined with benzylamine (1.0 mL, 9.16 mmol) and stirred overnight at 45 0 C.
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with water, combined with 2 N HCl and extracted three times with EtOAc.
  • diaminopyridines J-3 may be synthesised from the corresponding K-I -or K-2 intermediates/educts.
  • Examples XI-I to XI-5 (Table 9) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
  • Anilines K-5 are obtained using methods known from the literature, by reacting protected m-nitroanilines K-2 by reduction of the nitro group, diazotisation in hydrochloric NaNO 2 solution and reaction with sodium azide via the intermediate product Z-21 to form the aromatic azides K-3.
  • the protected nitroanilines K-2 are obtained from the free nitroanilines K-I by introducing the corresponding protective group (PG).
  • the protective groups used may be any amino protective groups that are stable under the following reaction conditions and are known for example from peptide synthesis, preferably the group Cbz (introduced using the acid chloride Cbz-Cl).
  • the cycloaddition (in order to introduce the group R 1 ) of the azides K-3 is carried out by methods known from the literature using a corresponding alkyne Z-3, CuSO 4 and sodium ascorbate and K-4.
  • the protected anilines K-4 are deprotected in the last step by cleaving the protective group under the respective conditions known from the literature to obtain the free aniline K-5 (Cbz ⁇ * Pd/C, H 2 ).
  • the alkynes Z-3 used to introduce the groups R 1 are either commercially obtainable or are prepared from aldehydes Z-2 that are commercially obtainable or synthesised by methods known from the literature, e.g. using the Bestmann-Ohira reagent.
  • the alkynes used may also be prepared from the aryl bromides and iodides and trimethylsilylacetylene that are commercially obtainable or synthesised using methods known from the literature by palladium-catalysed cross-coupling (Sonogashira) and subsequent cleaving of the silyl protective group.
  • anilines K-5 that are obtainable directly by these reaction methods may then be further modified in R 1 in a manner known from the literature or analogously to the literature to obtain further anilines K-5.
  • the groups R 1 of directly obtainable anilines K-5 consisting of a halogen- or amino-substituted heteroaryl, can be modified by reactions of substitution (at the heteroaryl itself), alkylation, acylation or addition (at the amino group of the heteroaryls).
  • transition metal-catalysed cross-coupling reactions (Ullmann, Buchwald-Hartwig, Sonogashira etc.) may be carried out on heteroarylbromides in R 1 in order to introduce various substituents.
  • nitroaniline K-2a (5.00 g, 17.5 mmol) is taken up in methanol (30 mL), mixed with Raney nickel (500 mg) and stirred under a hydrogen pressure of 8 bar for 18 h at RT.
  • the Cbz-protected aniline K-4a (4.0 g, 9.94 mmol) is taken up in 100 mL THF, mixed with Pd/C (2.0 g) and water (2 mL) and stirred overnight under a hydrogen pressure of 8 bar at 60 0 C.
  • the anilines K-5 described are used as synthesis components in all the following reaction sequences (schemes L and M) and in each case are coupled to benzoic acids (introduction of R 2 ).
  • These amide couplings are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of common coupling reagents, such as e.g. HATU or TBTU, or the respective benzoic acids are activated by thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride or Ghosez reagent using methods known from the literature to form the corresponding acid chloride and then reacted with the anilines K-5. Examples of reaction methods can be found there.
  • Example compounds of type XII (arylamines in the m-position to the amide link -> R 7 ), prepared according to general Scheme L, have an inverse amide bond, in relation to those of type III (reaction scheme D).
  • Example compounds of type XII are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the benzoic acids L-3 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding anilines K-5 described hereinbefore.
  • the benzoic acids L-3 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised by methods known from the literature from the corresponding benzoic acids L-I or benzonitriles L-2.
  • the compounds XII according to the invention thus obtained may be modified in R 1 (analogously to the anilines K-5 described above) to obtain other compounds XII according to the invention (cf. explanations relating to reaction scheme K).
  • the benzoic acids L-3 are prepared starting from arylhalides L-I by a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction (Buchwald-Hartwig) with an amine R 9 R 10 NH using methods known from the literature with the aid of common catalysts, such as for example biphenyl- 2-yl-di-tert-butylphosphane and tris-(dibenzylidene-acetone)-palladium, as well as a base, such as sodium- tert-butoxide or caesium carbonate, in 1,4-dioxane or toluene.
  • the amines R 9 R 10 NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • benzoic acids L-3 may also be synthesised starting from the corresponding fluorobenzonitriles L-2 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an amine or a nitrogen compound of general formula R 9 R 10 NH using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as e.g. dimethylacetamide, NMP, DMSO or DMF.
  • the substitution to obtain the intermediate product Z-22 in this case follows a nitrile saponification.
  • the compounds R 9 R 10 NH are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature
  • benzoic acids L-3 are converted to the corresponding acid azides by reaction with diphenyl phosphoryl azide (DPPA).
  • DPPA diphenyl phosphoryl azide
  • the Curtius rearrangement/ degradation reaction is carried out under heating in a toluene/base/alcohol solvent system; in which the isocyanate generated initially, is scavenged by the alcoholic co-solvent to yield the corresponding carbamate.
  • Preferred alcohols used as co-solvents allowing for an easy cleavage of the carbamate to yield the free anilines D-4 include ⁇ BuOH or te/t-amylalcohol.
  • the carbamates in Table 10 are a further aspect of this invention.
  • Benzoic acid L-3a (1.00 g, 3.45 mmol) is taken up in 10 rnL NMP, combined with HATU (1.11 g, 3.45 mmol) and DIPEA (891 mg, 6.89 mmol) and stirred for 40 min at RT. Then aniline K-5a (925 mg, 3.45 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT.
  • the crude product is taken up in EtOAc and washed with water. The combined organic phases are washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is purified by preparative HPLC.
  • Example compounds of type XII can also be prepared by altering the sequence of the reaction steps shown in reaction scheme L-I (-> reaction scheme L-II), by first synthesising the amide coupling products L-4 using methods known from the literature from the benzoic acids L-I and the anilines K-5 and then reacting them with an amine R 9 R 10 NH by a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction (Buchwald-Hartwig) using methods known from the literature with the aid of common catalysts, such as for example biphenyl-2-yl-di-ter ⁇ -butylphosphane and tris-(dibenzylidene-acetone)-palladium, and a base, such as sodium-tert-butoxide or caesium carbonate, in 1,4-dioxane or toluene, to obtain the end compounds XII.
  • a base such as sodium-tert-butoxide or caesium carbonate, in 1,4-dioxan
  • NEt 3 (4.69 mL, 33.8 mmol) is added to 3,5-dibromobenzylalcohol (3.00 g, 11.3 mmol) in THF (100 mL), then at 0 0 C methanesulphonic acid chloride (1.75 mL, 22.6 mmol) is slowly added dropwise and the mixture is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is evaporated down, the residue is taken up in 1 M NaOH and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated NaCl solution, dried on MgSO 4 , filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator.
  • the activated benzylalcohol thus obtained is taken up as a crude product (4.09 g, 11.9 mmol) in MeCN (30 mL), mixed with KCN (3.88 g, 59.5 mmol) and crown ether (18 K-6; 315 mg, 1.19 mmol) and stirred for 18 h at RT.
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted 2x with DCM.
  • the combined organic phases are washed with saturated NaCl solution, dried on MgSO 4 , filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator.
  • the nitrile thus obtained is placed as a crude product (3.27 g, 11.9 mmol) in THF (120 mL), cooled to -78°C, mixed with MeI (1.64 mL, 26.2 mmol), potassium- tert.- butoxide (3.13 g, 26.2 mmol) and crown ether (18-K-6; 635 mg, 2.38 mmol) and stirred for 30 min at this temperature.
  • the reaction mixture is left to thaw overnight at RT, combined with saturated NH 4 Cl solution (100 mL) and the aqueous phase is extracted 3x with EtOAc.
  • the combined organic phases are dried on MgSO 4 , filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator.
  • nitrile Z-23a thus obtained (2.00 g, 6.60 mmol) is taken up in THF (50 mL), cooled to -40 0 C, combined with isopropylmagnesium chloride/LiCl solution (0.9 M; 11.5 mL, 9.90 mmol) and stirred overnight at this temperature. Then CO2 gas is piped through the reaction mixture and in the mean time the mixture is allowed to thaw to RT. EtOAc is added and the mixture is extracted 3x with 1 M NaOH. The combined aqueous phase is acidified with cone, hydrochloric acid and extracted 3x with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are dried on MgSO 4 , filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The benzoic acid L-Ib thus obtained is used in the following reactions without any further purification.
  • the benzoic acid L-Ib (725 mg, 2.70 mmol) is placed in toluene (10 mL), mixed with SOCl 2 (0.37 mL, 5.14 mmol) and refluxed for 2 h. The mixture is left to cool, the aniline K-5a (725 mg, 2.70 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (1.4 mL, 8.11 mmol; dissolved in 5 mL toluene) are added and the mixture is refluxed for 1 h. It is diluted with 2 M NaOH, cooled to RT and the aqueous phase is extracted 3x with DCM.
  • Example compounds of type XIII and type XIV are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the benzoic acids M-2 or M-4 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding anilines K-5 described hereinbefore.
  • the benzoic acids M-2 or M-4 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding fluorobenzoic acids M-I or M-3 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an amine R 9 R 10 NH in common solvents such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF.
  • the amines R 9 R 10 NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • reaction conditions for the nucleophilic substitution are essentially independent of whether the starting material is an educt M-I (4-fluorobenzoic acid) or M-3
  • L-1-analogous o- and/?-bromobenzoic acids which are functionalised by palladium-catalysed cross-couplings (Buchwald-Hartwig) with the amines R 9 R 10 NH may also be used.
  • Example compounds of type XV are prepared from benzylalcohols N-3 either by substitution of the corresponding benzyl chloride by means of an amine/hydroxylamine R 9 R 10 NH (type XVa -» benzylamine) or aminoalcohol R 9 R 10 N(CH 2 ) y OH (or alkoxide, type XVb - ⁇ benzylether) or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R 9 R 10 NH (type XVa -> benzylamine).
  • the benzyl alcohols N-3 are reacted for this purpose by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding benzyl chloride.
  • the benzylalcohols N-3 may be oxidised e.g. with MnO 2 , Dess-Martin-Periodinane or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in acetic acid medium with Na(OAc) 3 BH or Na(CN)BH 3 and an amine R 9 R 10 NH using methods known from the literature to obtain compounds of type XVa.
  • the amines/hydroxylamines/aminoalcohols used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
  • the benzylalcohols N -3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the isophthalic acid monoesters N-2 (in order to introduce the group R 2 ) and the corresponding anilines K-5 described above, and subsequent reduction of the ester function.
  • the isophthalic acid monoesters N-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding isophthalic acids N-I by esterif ⁇ cation, e.g. with thionyl chloride in MeOH and subsequent monosaponification, e.g. with NaOH in MeOH via various intermediate products Z.
  • Methyl benzoate Z-25a (423 mg, 0.87 mmol) is taken up in THF (8 mL), and NaBH 4 (190 g, 5.02 mmol) and then LiCl (154 mg, 3.63 mmol) are added batchwise. The reaction mixture is heated to 50 0 C and stirred for 72 h. Then it is cooled to 0 0 C and combined with stirring with 1 M NaOH solution. THF is eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are washed with sat.
  • Example compounds of type XVa may also be synthesised by a slightly modified method according to reaction scheme N-II from the azides N-5 by cycloaddition with alkynes Z-3, CuSO 4 and sodium ascorbate.
  • the azides N-5 may be obtained from the corresponding benzylalcohols N-4 by diazotisation with for example NaNO 2 in hydrochloric acid, subsequent reaction with sodium azide, activation of the benzylalcohol using thionyl chloride, for example, followed by reaction with an amine R 9 R 10 NH.
  • the benzylalcohols N-4 are in turn synthesised by amide linking of the isophthalic acid monoester N-2 with nitroanilines K-I, subsequent reduction of the ester function, for example with NaBH 4 in the presence OfCaCl 2 , and subsequent reduction of the nitro group, for example with hydrogen and Pd/C or with Fe in the presence OfNH 4 Cl. c) Procedure for synthesising N-4a
  • the amide intermediate product (3.9 g, 10.1 mmol) is placed in EtOH (70 mL), combined with CaCl 2 (2.24 g, 20.3 mmol) and briefly stirred in the ultrasound bath. Then the mixture is cooled to 0 0 C and NaBH 4 (1.53 g, 40.5 mmol) in THF (70 mL) is added thereto. The mixture is left at this temperature for 1.5 h with stirring and then 1 N hydrochloric acid is carefully added. The aqueous phase is extracted with DCM (4 x 75 mL), the combined organic phase is dried on MgSO 4 , filtered off and evaporated down.
  • Examples XVa-2 and XVa-3 and Examples XVa-5 - XVa-33 (Table 13) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
  • Example compounds of type XVIa are synthesised according to reaction scheme O by a reaction of cycloaddition from the corresponding azides O-2 with suitable alkynes Z-3 in the presence OfCuSO 4 and sodium ascorbate using methods known from the literature.
  • the azide compounds O-2 may be obtained by amide coupling from the anilines O- 1 and the benzoic acids A-I using methods known from the literature.
  • Example compounds of type XVIb which have an inverse amide bond, compared with the compounds XVIa, may be synthesised from the corresponding benzoic acids O-3 with the anilines K-5 described hereinbefore.
  • the benzoic acids O-3 are synthesised using methods known from the literature. a) Procedure for svnthesising O-2a
  • Examples XVIa-2 to XVIa- 18 and Examples XVIb-2 to XVIb-7 (Table 14) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
  • the anilines K-5 or the respective benzoic acids and anilines used as coupling partners components with other functional groups may also be synthesised and used in the reactions (benzoic acids, arylalcohols -> esters; sulphonic acids, anilines -> sulphonamides, etc.).
  • Compounds of general formula (1) are characterised by their wide range of applications in the therapeutic field. Particular mention should be made of those applications in which the inhibition of specific signal enzymes, particularly the inhibiting effect on the proliferation of cultivated human tumour cells but also the proliferation of other cells, such as endothelial cells, for example, plays a part.
  • a dilution series 10 ⁇ L aliquots of test substance solution are placed in a multiwell plate.
  • the dilution series is selected so as to cover a range of concentrations from 2 ⁇ M to 0.128 or 0.017 nM. If necessary the initial concentration is changed from 2 ⁇ M to 10 or 0.4 ⁇ M and further dilution is carried out accordingly.
  • the final concentration of DMSO is 5 %.
  • the kinase reaction is started by the addition of 20 ⁇ L ATP solution [final concentration: 250 ⁇ M ATP, 30 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.02 % Brij, 0.2 mM sodium-orthovanadate, 10 mM magnesium acetate, phosphatase cocktail (Sigma, # P2850, dilution recommended by the manufacturer), 0.1 mM EGTA] and 10 ⁇ L MEKl solution [containing 50 ng biotinylated MEKl
  • SK-MEL28 American Type Culture Collection (ATCC)
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • SK-MEL28 cells are placed in 96-well flat-bottomed plates at a density of 2500 cells per well in supplemented MEM medium (see above) and incubated overnight in an incubator (at 37 0 C and 5 % CO 2 ).
  • the active substances are added to the cells in various concentrations so as to cover a range of concentrations from 50 ⁇ M to 3.2 nM. If necessary the initial concentration is changed from 50 ⁇ M to 10 ⁇ M or 2 ⁇ M and further dilution (to 0.6 nM or 0.12 nM) is carried out accordingly. After a further 72 hours incubation, 20 ⁇ l AlamarBlue reagent (Serotec Ltd., # BUF012B) is added to each well, and the cells are incubated for a further 3-6 hours. The colour change of the AlamarBlue reagent is determined in a fluorescence spectrophotometer (e.g. Gemini, Molecular Devices). EC50 values are calculated using the software programme (GraphPadPrizm).
  • melanoma cell line A375 American Type Culture Collection (ATCC)
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • test substances are tested on A375 cells according to the method described for SK-MEL28 cells (see above).
  • the substances of the present invention are B-Raf kinase inhibitors.
  • the inhibition of proliferation achieved by the compounds according to the invention is brought about primarily by preventing entry into the DNA synthesis phase.
  • the treated cells arrest in the Gl phase of the cell cycle.
  • the compounds according to the invention are also tested on other tumour cells.
  • these compounds are active on the colon carcinoma cell line Cok>205 and the breast cancer cell line DU4475 and can be used for these indications. This demonstrates the usefulness of the compounds according to the invention for treating various types of tumours.
  • the compounds of general formula (1) according to the invention are suitable for the treatment of diseases characterised by excessive or abnormal cell proliferation.
  • Such diseases include for example: viral infections (e.g. HIV and Kaposi's sarcoma); inflammatory and autoimmune diseases (e.g. colitis, arthritis, Alzheimer's disease, glomerulonephritis and wound healing); bacterial, fungal and/or parasitic infections; leukaemias, lymphomas and solid tumours (e.g. carcinomas and sarcomas), skin diseases (e.g. psoriasis); diseases based on hyperplasia which are characterised by an increase in the number of cells (e.g. fibroblasts, hepatocytes, bones and bone marrow cells, cartilage or smooth muscle cells or epithelial cells (e.g.
  • viral infections e.g. HIV and Kaposi's sarcoma
  • inflammatory and autoimmune diseases e.g. colitis, arthritis, Alzheimer's disease, glomerulonephritis and wound healing
  • bacterial, fungal and/or parasitic infections e.g. colitis, arthritis, Alzheimer's
  • endometrial hyperplasia bone diseases and cardiovascular diseases (e.g. restenosis and hypertrophy). They are also useful for protecting proliferating cells (e.g. hair, intestinal, blood and progenitor cells) from DNA damage caused by radiation, UV treatment and/or cytostatic treatment.
  • proliferating cells e.g. hair, intestinal, blood and progenitor cells
  • brain tumours such as for example acoustic neurinoma, astrocytomas such as pilocytic astrocytomas, fibrillary astrocytoma, protoplasmic astrocytoma, gemistocytary astrocytoma, anaplastic astrocytoma and glioblastoma, brain lymphomas, brain metastases, hypophyseal tumour such as prolactinoma, HGH (human growth hormone) producing tumour and ACTH producing tumour (adrenocorticotropic hormone), craniopharyngiomas, medulloblastomas, meningeomas and oligodendrogliomas; nerve tumours (neoplasms) such as for example tumours of the vegetative nervous system such as neuroblastoma sympathicum, ganglioneuroma, paraganglioma (pheochromocytoma, chromaffmo
  • the new compounds may be used for the prevention, short-term or long-term treatment of the above-mentioned diseases, optionally also in combination with radiotherapy or other "state-of-the-art" compounds, such as e.g. cytostatic or cytotoxic substances, cell proliferation inhibitors, anti-angiogenic substances, steroids or antibodies.
  • radiotherapy or other "state-of-the-art” compounds, such as e.g. cytostatic or cytotoxic substances, cell proliferation inhibitors, anti-angiogenic substances, steroids or antibodies.
  • the compounds of general formula (1) may be used on their own or in combination with other active substances according to the invention, optionally also in combination with other pharmacologically active substances.
  • Chemo therapeutic agents which may be administered in combination with the compounds according to the invention include, without being restricted thereto, hormones, hormone analogues and antihormones (e.g. tamoxifen, toremifene, raloxifene, fulvestrant, megestrol acetate, flutamide, nilutamide, bicalutamide, aminoglutethimide, cyproterone acetate, finasteride, buserelin acetate, fludrocortisone, fluoxymesterone, medroxyprogesterone, octreotide), aromatase inhibitors (e.g.
  • hormones e.g. tamoxifen, toremifene, raloxifene, fulvestrant, megestrol acetate, flutamide, nilutamide, bicalutamide, aminoglutethimide, cyproterone acetate, finasteride, buse
  • LHRH agonists and antagonists e.g. goserelin acetate, luprolide
  • inhibitors of growth factors growth factors such as for example "platelet derived growth factor” and “hepatocyte growth factor”
  • inhibitors are for example "growth factor” antibodies, “growth factor receptor” antibodies and tyrosinekinase inhibitors, such as for example gef ⁇ tinib, imatinib, lapatinib and trastuzumab
  • antimetabolites e.g.
  • antifolates such as methotrexate, raltitrexed, pyrimidine analogues such as 5-fluorouracil, capecitabin and gemcitabin, purine and adenosine analogues such as mercaptopurine, thioguanine, cladribine and pentostatin, cytarabine, fludarabine); antitumour antibiotics (e.g. anthracyclins such as doxorubicin, daunorubicin, epirubicin and idarubicin, mitomycin-C, bleomycin, dactinomycin, plicamycin, streptozocin); platinum derivatives (e.g.
  • alkylation agents e.g. estramustin, meclorethamine, melphalan, chlorambucil, busulphan, dacarbazin, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, temozolomide, nitrosoureas such as for example carmustin and lomustin, thiotepa
  • antimitotic agents e.g. Vinca alkaloids such as for example vinblastine, vindesin, vinorelbin and vincristine; and taxanes such as paclitaxel, docetaxel
  • topoisomerase inhibitors e.g.
  • epipodophyllotoxins such as for example etoposide and etopophos, teniposide, amsacrin, topotecan, irinotecan, mitoxantron) and various chemotherapeutic agents such as amifostin, anagrelid, clodronat, filgrastin, interferon alpha, leucovorin, rituximab, procarbazine, levamisole, mesna, mitotane, pamidronate and porf ⁇ mer.
  • epipodophyllotoxins such as for example etoposide and etopophos, teniposide, amsacrin, topotecan, irinotecan, mitoxantron
  • chemotherapeutic agents such as amifostin, anagrelid, clodronat, filgrastin, interferon alpha, leucovorin, rituximab, procarbazine, levamisole, me
  • Suitable preparations include for example tablets, capsules, suppositories, solutions - particularly solutions for injection (s.c, i.v., i.m.) and infusion -, elixirs, emulsions or dispersible powders.
  • the content of the pharmaceutically active compound(s) should be in the range from 0.1 to 90 wt.-%, preferably 0.5 to 50 wt.-% of the composition as a whole, i.e. in amounts which are sufficient to achieve the dosage range specified below.
  • the doses specified may, if necessary, be given several times a day.
  • Suitable tablets may be obtained, for example, by mixing the active substance(s) with known excipients, for example inert diluents such as calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or lactose, disintegrants such as corn starch or alginic acid, binders such as starch or gelatine, lubricants such as magnesium stearate or talc and/or agents for delaying release, such as carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, or polyvinyl acetate.
  • excipients for example inert diluents such as calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or lactose, disintegrants such as corn starch or alginic acid, binders such as starch or gelatine, lubricants such as magnesium stearate or talc and/or agents for delaying release, such as carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, or polyvinyl acetate.
  • excipients for example inert dilu
  • Coated tablets may be prepared accordingly by coating cores produced analogously to the tablets with substances normally used for tablet coatings, for example collidone or shellac, gum arabic, talc, titanium dioxide or sugar.
  • the core may also consist of a number of layers.
  • the tablet coating may consist of a number of layers to achieve delayed release, possibly using the excipients mentioned above for the tablets.
  • Syrups or elixirs containing the active substances or combinations thereof according to the invention may additionally contain a sweetener such as saccharine, cyclamate, glycerol or sugar and a flavour enhancer, e.g. a flavouring such as vanillin or orange extract. They may also contain suspension adjuvants or thickeners such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, wetting agents such as, for example, condensation products of fatty alcohols with ethylene oxide, or preservatives such as p-hydroxybenzoates.
  • a sweetener such as saccharine, cyclamate, glycerol or sugar
  • a flavour enhancer e.g. a flavouring such as vanillin or orange extract.
  • suspension adjuvants or thickeners such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, wetting agents such as, for example, condensation products of fatty alcohols with ethylene oxide, or preservatives such as p-hydroxybenzoates.
  • Solutions for injection and infusion are prepared in the usual way, e.g. with the addition of isotonic agents, preservatives such as p-hydroxybenzoates, or stabilisers such as alkali metal salts of ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, optionally using emulsif ⁇ ers and/or dispersants, whilst if water is used as the diluent, for example, organic solvents may optionally be used as solvating agents or dissolving aids, and transferred into injection vials or ampoules or infusion bottles.
  • Capsules containing one or more active substances or combinations of active substances may for example be prepared by mixing the active substances with inert carriers such as lactose or sorbitol and packing them into gelatine capsules.
  • Suitable suppositories may be made for example by mixing with carriers provided for this purpose, such as neutral fats or polyethyleneglycol or the derivatives thereof.
  • Excipients which may be used include, for example, water, pharmaceutically acceptable organic solvents such as paraffins (e.g. petroleum fractions), vegetable oils (e.g. groundnut or sesame oil), mono- or polyfunctional alcohols (e.g. ethanol or glycerol), carriers such as e.g. natural mineral powders (e.g. kaolins, clays, talc, chalk), synthetic mineral powders (e.g. highly dispersed silicic acid and silicates), sugars (e.g. cane sugar, lactose and glucose) emulsifiers (e.g.
  • lignin e.g. lignin, spent sulphite liquors, methylcellulose, starch and polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • lubricants e.g. magnesium stearate, talc, stearic acid and sodium lauryl sulphate.
  • the preparations are administered by the usual methods, preferably by oral or transdermal route, most preferably by oral route.
  • the tablets may, of course contain, apart from the abovementioned carriers, additives such as sodium citrate, calcium carbonate and dicalcium phosphate together with various additives such as starch, preferably potato starch, gelatine and the like.
  • lubricants such as magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulphate and talc may be used at the same time for the tabletting process.
  • the active substances may be combined with various flavour enhancers or colourings in addition to the excipients mentioned above.
  • solutions of the active substances with suitable liquid carriers may be used.
  • the dosage for intravenous use is from 1 - 1000 mg per hour, preferably between 5 and 500 mg per hour.
  • the finely ground active substance, lactose and some of the corn starch are mixed together.
  • the mixture is screened, then moistened with a solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone in water, kneaded, wet-granulated and dried.
  • the granules, the remaining corn starch and the magnesium stearate are screened and mixed together.
  • the mixture is compressed to produce tablets of suitable shape and size.
  • the active substance is dissolved in water at its own pH or optionally at pH 5.5 to 6.5 and sodium chloride is added to make it isotonic.
  • the solution obtained is filtered free from pyrogens and the filtrate is transferred under aseptic conditions into ampoules which are then sterilised and sealed by fusion.
  • the ampoules contain 5 mg, 25 mg and 50 mg of active substance.

Abstract

The present invention encompasses compounds of general formula (1), wherein the groups R1 to R3 and L are defined as in claim 1, which are suitable for the treatment of diseases characterised by excessive or abnormal cell proliferation, and their use for preparing a medicament having the above-mentioned properties.

Description

NEW CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
The present invention relates to new compounds of general formula (1)
Figure imgf000002_0001
(1)
wherein the groups R1 to R3 and L have the meanings given in the claims and specification and the tautomers, racemates, enantiomers, diastereomers, mixtures, polymorphs and salts of all these forms and their use as medicaments.
Background to the invention
Phenyl-substituted, nitrogen-containing five-ring heteroaryls for inhibiting cytokine production and hence for treating inflammatory diseases are described in WO 2004/050642, WO 2005/056535, WO 2005/090333, WO 2005/115991 and US 2006/0100204.
The aim of the present invention is to discover new active substances which can be used for the prevention and/or treatment of diseases characterised by excessive or abnormal cell proliferation.
Detailed description of the invention
It has now been found that, surprisingly, compounds of general formula (1) wherein the groups R1 to R3 and L have the meanings given hereinafter act as inhibitors of specific signal enzymes which are involved in controlling cell proliferation. Thus, the compounds according to the invention may be used for example for the treatment of diseases connected with the activity of these signal enzymes and characterised by excessive or abnormal cell proliferation. The present invention therefore relates to compounds of general formula (1)
Figure imgf000003_0001
(D
, wherein
R1 denotes a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s), each independently selected from among Ra and Rb;
R2 has the partial structure (i) or (ii)
Figure imgf000003_0002
R3 is selected from among hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO2, -NRhRh, -ORh, -C(O)Rh, -C(O)NRhRh, -SRh, -S(O)R\ -S(O)2Rh, CMalkyl, CMhaloalkyl, C3-7cycloalkyl and 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl; R5 is selected from among C1-6alkyl, -OCi-βalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, -OCi-βhaloalkyl,
C3-7cycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, all the above-mentioned groups optionally being substituted by C^alkyl, -CN or -OH; a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R6 or R7 has one of the partial structures (iii) to (vi)
Figure imgf000004_0001
(iϋ) (iv) (V) (vi) and in case a) the other two groups, each independently of one another, and in case b) the second group is/are selected from among hydrogen, C^alkyl, -OCi_6alkyl, -OH, -CN, -NHCi-ealkyl, -N(Ci.6alkyl)2 and halogen or c) where partial structure (i) is present R5 denotes a Ci_6alkyl or C3-4 eye loalkyl substituted by a substituent -CN and R6, R7 and R8 each denote hydrogen;
R9 is selected from among hydrogen and Ci_6alkyl, R10 is selected from among Ra and -ORa, or the group -NR9R10 in all denotes a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb;
R11, R12 and R13 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R11 corresponds to a group Ra and the group -NR12R13 together denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, or R11 and R12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R13 corresponds to a group Ra;
R14, R15 and R16 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R14 corresponds to a group Ra and the group NR15R16 together denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, or
R14 and R15 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R16 corresponds to a group Ra;
R17, R18 and R19 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R17 and R18 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R19 corresponds to a group Ra, or R17 and R19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R18 corresponds to a group Ra, or
R18 and R19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R17 corresponds to a group Ra;
L is selected from among -C(O)NH-, -NHC(O)-, -C(S)NH-, -NHC(S)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -NH-, -S(O)- -S(O)O-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2O-, -S(O)NH-, -S(O)2NH-, -OS(O)- -OS(O)2-, -OS(O)NH-, -OS(O)2NH-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)S-, -C(NH)NH-, -OC(O)-, -OC(O)O-, -OC(O)NH-, -SC(O)- -SC(O)O-, -SC(O)NH-, -NHC(NH)- -NHS(O)-, -NHS(O)O-, -NHS(O)2-, -NHS(O)2O-, -NHS(O)2NH-, -NHC(O)O-, -NHC(O)NH- and -NHC(S)NH- or denotes a bond; Y is selected from among -O- and -S- or denotes a bond; x and y each independently of one another have the value 0, 1, 2 or 3; each Ra independently of one another in each case denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rb and/or Rc, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C^iβCycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rb denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORC, -SRC, -NRCRC, -ONRCRC, -N(ORC)RC, -NRgNRcRc, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3, -C(O)RC, -C(O)ORC, -C(O)NRCRC, -C(O)SRC, -C(0)NRgNRcRc, -C(O)NRgORc, -[C(O)]2NRCRC, -[C(O)NRS]2RC, -C(S)RC, -C(S)ORC, -C(S)NRCRC, -C(S)SRC, -C(NRg)Rc, -N=CRCRC, -C(NRg)ORc, -C(NRg)NRcRc, -C(NRg)SRc, -C(NRg)NRgNRcRc, -C(N0Rg)Rc, -C(NORg)NRcRc, -C(NNRgRg)Rc, -C[NNRgC(O)NRgRg]Rc, -OS(O)RC, -OS(O)ORC, -OS(O)NRCRC, -OS(O)2R0, -OS(O)2OR0, -OS(O)2NRCRC, -OC(O)RC, -OC(O)ORC, -OC(O)SRC, -0C(0)NRcRc, -0[C(0)]2NRcRc, -0[C(0)NRg]2NRcRc, -OC(S)RC, -0C(NRg)Rc, -0C(NRg)NRcRc, -0NRgC(0)Rc, -S(O)RC, -S(O)ORC, -S(O)NRCRC, -S(O)2RC, -S(O)2OR0, -S(O)2NRCRC, -[S(O)2]2NRCRC, -SC(O)RC, -SC(O)ORC, -SC(O)NRCRC, -SC(S)RC, -SC(NRg)Rc, -SC(NRg)NRcRc, -NRgC(0)Rc, -NRgC(0)0Rc, -NRgC(O)NRcRc, -NRgC(O)SRc, -NRgC(O)NRgNRcRc, -NRgC(S)Rc, -NRgC(S)NRcRc, -NRgC(NRg)Rc, -N=CRCNRCRC, -NRgC(NRg)0Rc, -NRgC(NRg)NRcRc, -NRgC(NRg)SRc, -NRgC(N0Rg)Rc, -NRgS(O)Rc, -NRgS(O)ORc, -NRgS(O)2Rc, -NRgS(O)2ORc, -NRgS(0)2NRcRc, -NRgNRgC(0)Rc, -NRgNRgC(O)NRcRc, -NRgNRgC(NRg)Rc, -NRg[C(0)]2Rc, -NRg[C(0)]20Rc, -NRg[C(0)]2NRcRc, -[NRgC(0)]2Rc, -[NR§C(0)]20Rc, -NRS[S(O)2]2RC, -N(0Rs)C(0)Rc, -N[C(O)RC]NRCRC, -N[C(O)RC]2, -N[S(O)2RC]2, -N{[C(O)]2RC}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORC}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NRCRC}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRg, =N0Rg, =NNRgRg and =NNRgC(0)NRgRg, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Rc independently of one another in each case denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rd and/or Re, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered hetero-aryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rd is a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORe, -SRe, -NReRe, -ONReRe, -N(ORe)Re, -N(Rg)NReRe, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3,-C(O)Re, -C(O)ORe, -C(0)NReRe, -C(O)SRe, -C(0)NRgNReRe, -C(O)NRsORe, -[C(O)]2NReRe, -[C(O)NRg]2Re, -C(S)Re, -C(S)ORe, -C(S)NReRe, -C(S)SRe, -C(NRg)Re, -N=CReRe, -C(NRg)ORe, -C(NRg)NReRe, -C(NRg)SRe, -C(NRg)NRgNReRe, -C(NORg)Re, -C(N0Rg)NReRe, -C(NNRgRg)Re, -C[NNRgC(O)NRgRg]Re, -OS(O)Re, -OS(O)ORe, -OS(O)NReRe, -OS(O)2R6,
-OS(O)2OR6, -OS(O)2NReRe, -OC(O)Re, -OC(O)ORe, -OC(O)SRe, -0C(0)NReRe, -0[C(0)]2NReRe, -0[C(0)NRg]2NReRe, -OC(S)Re, -OC(NRg)Re, -0C(NRg)NReRe, -0NRgC(0)Re, -S(O)Re, -S(O)ORe, -S(0)NReRe, -S(O)2R6, -S(O)2ORe, -S(O)2NReRe, -[S(O)2]2NReRe, -SC(O)Re, -SC(O)ORe, -SC(O)NReRe, -SC(S)Re, -SC(NRg)Re, -SC(NRg)NReRe, -NRgC(0)Re, -NRgC(0)0Re, -NRgC(O)NReRe, -NRgC(O)SRe,
-NRgC(O)NRgNReRe, -NRgC(S)Re, -NRgC(S)NReRe, -NRgC(NRg)Re, -N=CR6NR6R6, -NRgC(NRg)0Re, -NRgC(NRg)NReRe, -NRgC(NRg)SRe, -NRgC(N0Rg)Re, -NRgS(O)Re, -NRgS(O)ORe, -NRgS(0)2Re, -NRgS(O)2ORe, -NRgS(0)2NReRe, -NRgNRgC(0)Re, -NRgNRgC(O)NReRe, -NRgNRgC(NRg)Re, -NRg[C(0)]2Re, -NRg[C(0)]20Re, -NRg[C(0)]2NReRe, -[NRgC(0)]2Re, -[NRgC(0)]20Re, -NRs[S(O)2]2Re, -N(0Rs)C(0)Re, -N[C(0)Re]NReRe, -N[C(0)Re]2, -N[S(O)2Re]2, -N{[C(O)]2Re}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORe}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NReRe}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRg, =N0Rg, =NNRgRg and =NNRgC(0)NRgRg, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Re independently of one another in each case denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rf and/or Rg, selected from among Ci-βalkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rf is a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -OR8, -SRg, -NRgRg, -ONRgRg, -N(ORg)Rg, -N(Rh)NRgRg, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3,-C(O)Rg, -C(O)ORg, -C(O)NRgRg ,-C(O)SRg, -C(O)NRhNRgRg, -C(O)NRhORg, -[C(O)]2NRgRg, -[C(O)NRh]2Rg, -C(S)Rg, -C(S)OR8, -C(S)NRgRg, -C(S)SR8, -C(NRh)R8, -N=CR8R8, -C(NRh)OR8, -C(NRh)NR8R8, -C(NRh)SR8, -C(NRh)NRhNR8R8, -C(NORh)R8, -C(NORh)NR8R8, -C(NNRhRh)R8,
-C[NNRhC(O)NRhRh]R8, -OS(O)R8, -OS(O)OR8, -OS(O)NR8R8, -OS(O)2R8, -OS(O)2OR8, -OS(O)2NR8R8, -OC(O)R8, -OC(O)OR8, -OC(O)SR8, -OC(O)NR8R8, -O[C(O)]2NR8R8, -O[C(O)NRh]2NR8R8, -OC(S)R8, -OC(NRh)R8, -OC(NRh)NR8Rg, -ONRhC(O)R8, -S(O)R8, -S(O)OR8, -S(O)NR8R8, -S(O)2R8, -S(O)2OR8, -S(O)2NR8R8, -[S(O)2]2NR8R8, -SC(O)R8, -SC(O)OR8, -SC(O)NR8R8, -SC(S)R8, -SC(NRh)R8, -SC(NRh)NRgRg, -NRhC(O)Rg, -NRhC(O)ORg, -NRhC(O)NR8R8, -NRhC(O)SR8, -NRhC(O)NRhNR8R8, -NRhC(S)R8, -NR11C(S)NR8R8, -NRhC(NRh)R8, -N=CR8NRgRg, -NRhC(NRh)ORg, -NRhC(NRh)NRgRg, -NRhC(NRh)SRg, -NRhC(NORh)Rg, -NRhS(O)Rg, -NRhS(O)ORg, -NRhS(O)2Rg, -NRhS(O)2ORg, -NRhS(O)2NRgRg, -NRhNRhC(O)R8, -NRhNRhC(O)NRgRg, -NRhNRhC(NRh)Rg, -NRh[C(O)]2Rg, -NRh[C(O)]2ORg,
-NRh[C(O)]2NRgRg, -[NRhC(O)]2Rg ,-[NRhC(O)]2ORg, -NRh[S(O)2]2Rg, -N(ORh)C(O)Rg, -N[C(0)Rg]NRgRg, -N[C(O)Rg]2, -N[S(O)2Rg]2, -N{[C(O)]2Rg}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORg}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NRgRg}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRh, =N0Rh, =NNRhRh and =NNRhC(0)NRhRh, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Rg in each case independently of one another denote hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rh, selected from among C1^aIkVl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C^iβcycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered hetero-aryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rh is selected independently of one another in each case from among hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci_6haloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6Cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; while the compounds (1) may optionally also be present in the form of the tautomers, the racemates, the enantiomers, the diastereomers, the mixtures thereof, the polymorphs thereof or as pharmacologically acceptable salts of all the above-mentioned forms; with the proviso that the compound
Λ/-(5-tert-butyl-3-{[(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-methyl-amino]-methyl}-2-methoxy-phenyl)- 4-methyl-3-(4-pyridin-3-yl-[ 1.2.3]triazol- 1 -yl)-benzamide is excluded.
In one aspect (Al) the invention relates to compounds of general formula (1)
Figure imgf000009_0001
(D
, wherein
R1 denotes a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s), each independently selected from among Ra and Rb;
R2 has the partial structure (i) or (ii)
Figure imgf000009_0002
R3 is selected from among hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO2, -NRhRh, -ORh, -C(O)Rh, -C(O)NRhRh, -SRh, -S(O)Rh, -S(O)2Rh, d_4alkyl, Ci_4haloalkyl, C3-7cycloalkyl and 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl;
R5 is selected from among
Figure imgf000009_0003
-OCi_6alkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, -OCi-βhaloalkyl, C3_7cycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, all the above-mentioned groups optionally being substituted by Ci_6alkyl, -CN or -OH; a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R6 or R7 has one of the partial structures (iii) to (vi)
Figure imgf000010_0001
('") ("V) (v) (vi) and in case a) the other two groups in each case independently of one another and in case b) the second group is/are selected from among hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl, -OCi_6alkyl, -OH, -CN, -NHCi_6alkyl, -N(Ci_6alkyl)2 and halogen;
R9 is selected from among hydrogen and Ci_6alkyl, R10 is selected from among Ra and -ORa, or the group -NR9R10 altogether denotes a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb; R11, R12 and R13 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R11 corresponds to a group Ra and the group -NR12R13 altogether denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, or
R11 and R12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R13 corresponds to a group Ra;
R14, R15 and R16 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R14 corresponds to a group Ra and the group NR15R16 altogether denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, or
R14 and R15 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R16 corresponds to a group Ra;
R17, R18 and R19 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R17 and R18 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R19 corresponds to a group Ra, or R17 and R19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R18 corresponds to a group Ra, or
R18 and R19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R17 corresponds to a group Ra;
L is selected from among -C(O)NH-, -NHC(O)-, -C(S)NH-, -NHC(S)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -NH-, -S(O)-, -S(O)O-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2O-, -S(O)NH-, -S(O)2NH-, -OS(O)-, -OS(O)2-, -OS(O)NH-, -OS(O)2NH-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)S-, -C(NH)NH-, -OC(O)-, -OC(O)O-, -OC(O)NH-, -SC(O)-, -SC(O)O-, -SC(O)NH-, -NHC(NH)- -NHS(O)-, -NHS(O)O-, -NHS(O)2-, -NHS(O)2O-, -NHS(O)2NH-, -NHC(O)O-, -NHC(O)NH- and -NHC(S)NH- or denotes a bond; Y is selected from among -O- and -S- or denotes a bond; x and y each independently of one another have the value 0, 1, 2 or 3; each Ra denotes, independently of one another in each case, hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rb and/or Rc, selected from among Ci-βalkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl,
C^iβcycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7-16arylalkyl, 5-12 membered hetero-aryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rb denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORC, -SRC, -NRCRC, -ONRCRC, -N(ORC)RC, -NRgNRcRc, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3,-C(O)RC, -C(O)ORC, -C(O)NRCRC, -C(O)SRC, -C(0)NRgNRcRc, -C(O)NRgORc, -[C(O)]2NRCRC, -[C(O)NRS]2RC, -C(S)RC, -C(S)ORC, -C(S)NRCRC, -C(S)SRC, -C(NRg)Rc, -N=CRCRC, -C(NRg)ORc, -C(NRg)NRcRc, -C(NRg)SRc, -C(NRg)NRgNRcRc, -C(NORg)Rc, -C(NORg)NRcRc, -C(NNRgRg)Rc, -C[NNRgC(O)NRgRg]Rc, -OS(O)RC, -OS(O)ORC, -OS(O)NRCRC, -OS(O)2R0,
-OS(O)2OR0, -OS(O)2NRCRC, -OC(O)RC, -OC(O)OR0, -OC(O)SRC, -0C(0)NRcRc, -0[C(0)]2NRcRc, -0[C(0)NRg]2NRcRc, -OC(S)RC, -OC(NRg)Rc, -0C(NRg)NRcRc, -0NRgC(0)Rc, -S(O)RC, -S(O)ORC, -S(O)NRCRC, -S(O)2RC, -S(O)2ORC, -S(O)2NRCRC, -[S(O)2]2NRCRC, -SC(O)RC, -SC(O)ORC, -SC(O)NRCRC, -SC(S)RC, -SC(NRg)Rc, -SC(NRg)NRcRc, -NRgC(0)Rc, -NRgC(0)0Rc, -NRgC(O)NRcRc, -NRgC(O)SRc,
-NRgC(O)NRgNRcRc, -NRgC(S)Rc, -NRgC(S)NRcRc, -NRgC(NRg)Rc, -N=CRCNRCRC, -NRgC(NRg)0Rc, -NRgC(NRg)NRcRc, -NRgC(NRg)SRc, -NRgC(N0Rg)Rc, -NRgS(O)Rc, -NRgS(O)ORc, -NRgS(0)2Rc, -NRgS(O)2ORc, -NRgS(0)2NRcRc, -NRgNRgC(0)Rc, -NRgNRgC(O)NRcRc, -NRgNRgC(NRg)Rc, -NRg[C(0)]2Rc, -NRs[C(0)]20Rc, -NRg[C(0)]2NRcRc, -[NRgC(0)]2Rc, -[NRgC(0)]20Rc, -NRg[S(O)2]2Rc, -N(0Rg)C(0)Rc, -N[C(O)RC]NRCRC, -N[C(O)RC]2, -N[S(O)2RC]2, -N{[C(O)]2RC}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORC}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NRCRC}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRg, =N0Rg, =NNRgRg and =NNRgC(0)NRgRg, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Rc denotes, independently of one another in each case, hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rd and/or Re, selected from among d^alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rd denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORe, -SRe, -NReRe, -ONReRe, -N(ORe)Re, -N(Rg)NReRe, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3,-C(O)Re, -C(O)ORe, -C(O)NReRe, -C(O)SRe, -C(0)NRgNReRe, -C(O)NRgORe, -[C(O)]2NReRe, -[C(O)NR8J2R6, -C(S)Re, -C(S)ORe, -C(S)NReRe, -C(S)SRe, -C(NRg)Re, -N=CReRe, -C(NRg)ORe, -C(NR8)NR6R6,
-C(NRg)SRe, -C(NR8)NR8NR6R6, -C(NORg)Re, -C(NORg)NReRe, -C(NNRgRg)Re, -C[NNRgC(O)NRgRg]Re, -OS(O)Re, -OS(O)ORe, -OS(O)NReRe, -OS(O)2R6, -OS(O)2OR6, -OS(O)2NR6R6, -OC(O)R6, -OC(O)ORe, -OC(O)SRe, -OC(O)NReRe, -0[C(0)]2NReRe, -0[C(0)NRg]2NReRe, -OC(S)Re, -0C(NRg)Re, -0C(NRg)NReRe, -0NRgC(0)Re, -S(O)Re, -S(O)ORe, -S(0)NReRe, -S(O)2R6, -S(O)2OR6, -S(O)2NR6R6, [S(O)2]2NR6R6, -SC(O)R6, -SC(O)OR6, -SC(O)NR6R6, -SC(S)R6, -SC(NRg)R6, -SC(NRg)NR6R6, -NR8C(O)R6, -NR8C(O)OR6, -NR8C(O)NR6R6, -NR8C(O)SR6, -NR8C(O)NR8NR6R6, -NR8C(S)R6, -NR8C(S)NR6R6, -NR8C(NR8)R6, -N=CR6NR6R6, -NR8C(NR8)OR6, -NR8C(NR8)NR6R6, -NR8C(NR8)SR6, -NR8C(NOR8)R6, -NR8S(O)R6, -NR8S(O)OR6, -NR8S(O)2R6, -NR8S(O)2OR6, -NRgS(0)2NReRe, -NR8NR8C(O)R6, -NR8NR8C(O)NR6R6, -NR8NR8C(NR8)R6, -NR8[C(O)]2R6, -NR8[C(O)]2OR6, -NR8[C(0)]2NR6R6, -[NR8C(O)J2R6, -[NR8C(O)]2OR6, -NR^S(O)2J2R6, -N(0R8)C(0)R6, -N[C(O)R6JNR6R6, -N[C(O)R6J2, -N[S(O)2R6J2, -N ([C(O)J2R6J2, -N{[C(O)]2ORe}2 and -N ([C(O)J2NR6R6) 2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NR8, =N0R8, =NNR8R8 and =NNR8C(O)NR8R8, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Re denotes, independently of one another in each case, hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rf and/or Rg, selected from among d-βalkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, Cs-iocycloalkyl,
Figure imgf000013_0001
Cβ-ioaryl, C7-16arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rf denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORg, -SRg, -NRgRg, -ONRgRg, -N(ORg)Rg, -N(Rh)NRgRg, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3, -C(O)Rg, -C(O)OR8, -C(0)NRgRg, -C(O)SR8,
-C(O)NR11NR8R8, -C(O)NRhOR8, -[C(O)J2NR8R8, -[C(0)NRh]2Rg, -C(S)R8, -C(S)OR8, -C(S)NR8R8, -C(S)SR8, -C(NRh)R8, -N=CR8R8, -C(NRh)0Rg, -C(NRh)NR8R8, -C(NRh)SR8, -C(NRh)NRhNR8R8, -C(N0Rh)R8, -C(NORh)NR8R8, -C(NNRhRh)Rg, -C[NNRhC(0)NRhRh]R8, -OS(O)R8, -OS(O)OR8, -OS(O)NR8R8, -OS(O)2R8, -OS(O)2OR8, -OS(O)2NR8R8, -OC(O)R8, -OC(O)OR8, -OC(O)SR8, -OC(O)NR8R8, -O[C(O)]2NR8R8, -O[C(O)NRh]2NR8R8, -OC(S)R8, -0C(NRh)R8, -0C(NRh)NR8Rg, -0NRhC(0)R8, -S(O)R8, -S(O)OR8, -S(O)NR8R8, -S(O)2R8, -S(O)2OR8, -S(O)2NR8R8, [S(O)2]2NRgRg, -SC(O)R8, -SC(O)OR8, -SC(O)NR8R8, -SC(S)R8, -SC(NRh)R8, -SC(NRh)NR8R8, -NRhC(0)R8, -NRhC(0)0R8, -NRhC(O)NR8R8, -NRhC(O)SR8, -NRhC(O)NRhNR8R8, -NRhC(S)R8, -NRhC(S)NR8R8, -NRhC(NRh)R8, -N=CR8NR8R8, -NRhC(NRh)0R8, -NRhC(NRh)NR8R8, -NRhC(NRh)SR8, -NRhC(N0Rh)R8, -NRhS(0)R8, -NRhS(0)0Rg, -NR11S(O)2R8, -NR11S(O)2OR8, -NR11S(O)2NR8R8, -NRhNRhC(O)Rg, -NRhNRhC(O)NR8R8, -NRhNRhC(NRh)R8, -NRh[C(O)]2R8, -NRh[C(O)]2OR8, -NRh[C(O)]2NR8R8, -[NRhC(O)]2R8 ,-[NRhC(0)]20Rg, -NRh[S(O)2]2Rg, -N(0Rh)C(0)Rg, -N[C(0)Rg]NRgRg, -N[C(O)R8J2, -N[S(O)2R8J2, -N {[C(O)]2RS}2, -N {[C(O)]2ORg}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NRgRg}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRh, =N0Rh, =NNRhRh and =NNRhC(0)NRhRh, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Rg denotes, independently of one another in each case, hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rh, selected from among
Ci-βalkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered hetero-aryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rh is selected independently of one another in each case from among hydrogen, Ci-βalkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_i0cycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, Cy.iβarylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; while the compounds (1) may optionally also be in the form of the tautomers, the racemates, the enantiomers, the diastereomers, the mixtures thereof, the polymorphs thereof or as pharmacologically acceptable salts of all the above-mentioned forms; with the proviso that the compound
Λ/-(5-tert-butyl-3-{[(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-methyl-amino]-methyl}-2-methoxy-phenyl)- 4-methyl-3-(4-pyridin-3-yl-[ 1.2.3]triazol- 1 -yl)-benzamide is excluded.
In another aspect (Bl) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein
R1 denotes a heteroaryl selected from among pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,
Figure imgf000015_0001
In another aspect (B2) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R1 is mono- or polysubstituted by identical or different groups and the group(s) is/are each independently selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3-iocycloalkyl, C^iβcycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7-16aiylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl, -OH, -OCi_6alkyl, -NH2, -NHCi_6alkyl, -NHCs-iocycloalkyl, -N(Ci_6alkyl)2, -NHC(O)Ci_6alkyl, -NHC(O)OCi_6alkyl, -NHC(O)NHC i_6alkyl, halogen, -C(O)Ci_6alkyl, -C(O)C3-I ocycloalkyl, -Sd^alkyl, -C(O)OC i_6alkyl, -C(O)NHC i_6alkyl, -CN and -NHC(O)C3-7cycloalkyl, all the above-mentioned groups optionally themselves being substituted by a substituent selected from among -OH, -OCi_6alkyl, -OCs-iocyeloalkyl, -NH2, -NHCi_6alkyl, -NHCi_6haloalkyl, -NHCs-iocycloalkyl, -N(Ci_6alkyl)2, halogen, -C(O)OCi_6alkyl, d.6alkyl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl.
In another aspect (Cl) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein
R3 is selected from among methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, ώo-propyl, 1 -propyl, 1 -butyl, 2-butyl, tert-butyi, fluorine, chlorine and bromine.
In another aspect (Dl) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L is selected from among -C(O)NH- and -NHC(O)-.
In another aspect (A2) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R5 is selected from among
Figure imgf000016_0001
Figure imgf000016_0002
In another aspect (A3) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R6 or R7 has one of the partial structures (iii-a) to (iii-h)
Figure imgf000017_0001
and R9 and R10 are as hereinbefore defined.
In another aspect (A4) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b) or (iii-c), or one of the groups R »6 or r R,7 has the partial structure (iii-d), or R7 has the partial structure (iii-e), (ϋi-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h); and b) where partial structure (ii) is present R7 has the partial structure (iii-a).
In another aspect (D2) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L denotes-NHC(O)-.
In another aspect (El) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L denotes-C(O)NH-; the partial structure (i) is present and one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 has the partial structure (iii-a) or
R7 has the partial structure (iii-d).
In another aspect (A5) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present
R7 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (ϋi-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h),
R6 is selected from among hydrogen, C^alkyl, -OCi-βalkyl, chlorine and fluorine and
R8 is selected from among hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl and -OCi_6alkyl; or
R6 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h) and
R7 and R8 denote hydrogen; or
R8 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h) and R6 and R7 denote hydrogen; and b) where partial structure (ii) is present
R7 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h) and R6 denotes hydrogen.
In another aspect (A6) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein the partial structure (i) is present and R7 has the partial structure (iv).
In another aspect (D3) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein L denotes-NHC(O)-.
In another aspect (A7) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R6 and R8 each denote hydrogen.
In another aspect (A8) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein R10 and R13 are each independently of one another selected from among Ral and -OCi_6alkyl;
Ral denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rbl and/or Rcl, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rbl denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORcl, -NRclRcl, -C(O)Rcl, -C(O)NRclRcl, -NHC(O)Rcl as well as the bivalent substituent =0, while the latter may only be a substituent in non-aromatic ring systems; each Rcl denotes, independently of one another in each case, hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rdl and/or Rel, selected from among Ci-βalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl; each Rdl denotes the bivalent substituent =0, which may only be a substituent in non- aromatic ring systems; and each Rel is selected independently in each case from among hydrogen,
Figure imgf000019_0001
and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl; or the groups -NR9R10 and -NR12R13 altogether and independently of one another represent in each case a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, in each case optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra2 and Rb2; each Ra2 denotes a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rb2 and/or Rc2, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C^iβcycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl; each Rb2 denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORc2, -NRc2Rc2, halogen as well as the bivalent substituent =0, while the latter may only be a substituent in non-aromatic ring systems; each Rc2 is selected independently in each case from among hydrogen, Ci-6alkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl and 5-12 membered heteroaryl.
In another aspect (A9) the invention relates to compounds (1), wherein
R10 and R13 are selected independently in each case from among methyl; ethyl; allyl; 2-propyl; 2-hydroxyethyl; 2-aminoethyl; 2-methoxyethyl; 2,2-dimethoxyethyl; 2,3-dihydroxypropyl; 2-methylpropyl; cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl; 1,1-dimethylethyl; methoxy; 2,2-dimethylpropyl;
Figure imgf000020_0001
or
the groups -NR R and -NR ,12τ R,13 altogether and independently of one another denote
Figure imgf000021_0001
or
R13 denotes d_6alkyl and
R11 and R12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a heterocycloalkyl, selected from among
Figure imgf000022_0001
,13/N x ^y _ j R Y f and
All the structural aspects mentioned hereinbefore relating to different molecular parts of the compounds according to the invention (1) maybe combined with one another in any desired manner, to produce preferred compounds (1). The invention expressly includes all the combinations of the aspects Al - A9, Bl and B2, Cl, Dl - D3 and El with one another.
In another aspect the invention relates to compounds - or the pharmacologically acceptable salts - of general formula (1) as medicaments.
In another aspect the invention relates to pharmaceutical preparations, containing as active substance one or more compounds of general formula (1) or the pharmacologically acceptable salts thereof, optionally in combination with conventional excipients and/or carriers. In another aspect the invention relates to the use of compounds of general formula (1) for preparing a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment and/or prevention of cancer, infections, inflammations and autoimmune diseases.
In another aspect the invention relates to a pharmaceutical preparation comprising a compound of general formula (1), while the compounds (1) are optionally also in the form of the tautomers, the racemates, the enantiomers, the diastereomers, the mixtures thereof, the polymorphs thereof or as pharmacologically acceptable salts of all the above- mentioned forms, and at least one other cytostatic or cytotoxic active substance different from formula (1).
Definitions
As used herein, the following definitions apply, unless stated otherwise:
The use of the prefix Cx-y, where x and y in each case denote a natural number (x < y), indicates that the chain or ring structure or the combination of chain and ring structure mentioned and specified in direct connection may consist of a maximum of y and a minimum of x carbon atoms altogether.
The indication of number of members in groups that contain one or more heteroatom(s) (heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl) refers to the total number of atoms in all the ring members or chain members or the total of all the ring members and chain members.
Alkyl is made up of the sub-groups saturated hydrocarbon chains and unsaturated hydrocarbon chains, while the latter may be further subdivided into hydrocarbon chains with a double bond (alkenyl) and hydrocarbon chains with a triple bond (alkynyl). Alkenyl contains at least one double bond, alkynyl at least one triple bond. If a hydrocarbon chain should have both at least one double bond and at least one triple bond, by definition it belongs to the alkynyl sub-group. All the above-mentioned sub-groups may be further subdivided into straight-chain (unbranched) and branched. If an alkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or polysubstituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms.
Examples of individual sub-groups are listed below.
Straight-chain (unbranched) or branched, saturated hydrocarbon chains: methyl; ethyl; /? -propyl; isopropyl (1-methylethyl); « -butyl; 1-methylpropyl; isobutyl (2-methylpropyl); sec. -butyl ( 1 -methylpropyl); tert. -butyl (1.1 -dimethylethyl); n-pentyl; 1-methylbutyl; 1-ethylpropyl; isopentyl (3-methylbutyl); neopentyl (2,2-dimethyl-propyl); n-hexyl; 2,3-dimethylbutyl; 2,2-dimethylbutyl; 3,3-dimethylbutyl; 2-methyl-pentyl; 3-methylpentyl; n-heptyl; 2-methylhexyl; 3-methylhexyl; 2,2-dimethylpentyl; 2,3-dimethylpentyl; 2,4-dimethylpentyl; 3,3-dimethylpentyl; 2,2,3-trimethylbutyl; 3-ethylpentyl; n-octyl; n-nonyl; n-decyl etc.
straight-chained (unbranched) or branched alkenyl: vinyl (ethenyl); prop-1-enyl; allyl (prop-2-enyl); isopropenyl; but-1-enyl; but-2-enyl; but-3-enyl; 2-methyl-prop-2-enyl; 2-methyl-prop-l-enyl; l-methyl-prop-2-enyl; 1 -methyl-prop- 1-enyl; 1-methylidenepropyl; pent-1-enyl; pent-2-enyl; pent-3-enyl; pent-4-enyl; 3-methyl-but-3-enyl; 3-methyl-but-2-enyl; 3 -methyl-but- 1-enyl; hex- 1-enyl; hex-2-enyl; hex-3-enyl; hex-4-enyl; hex-5-enyl; 2,3-dimethyl-but-3-enyl; 2,3-dimethyl- but-2-enyl; 2-methylidene-3-methylbutyl; 2,3-dimethyl-but- 1-enyl; hexa-l,3-dienyl; hexa-l,4-dienyl; penta-l,4-dienyl; penta-l,3-dienyl; buta-l,3-dienyl; 2,3-dimethylbuta-l,3-diene etc. straight-chain (unbranched) or branched alkvnyl: ethynyl; prop-1-ynyl; prop-2-ynyl; but-1-ynyl; but-2-ynyl; but-3-ynyl; l-methyl-prop-2-ynyl etc.
By the terms propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl etc. unless otherwise stated are meant saturated hydrocarbon groups with the corresponding number of carbon atoms, including all the isomeric forms.
By the terms propenyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, nonenyl, decenyl etc. unless otherwise stated are meant unsaturated hydrocarbon groups with the corresponding number of carbon atoms and a double bond, including all the isomeric forms, also (Z)I(E)- isomers, where applicable.
By the terms butadienyl, pentadienyl, hexadienyl, heptadienyl, octadienyl, nonadienyl, decadienyl etc. unless otherwise stated are meant unsaturated hydrocarbon groups with the corresponding number of carbon atoms and two double bonds, including all the isomeric forms, also (Z)/(iT)-isomers, where applicable.
By the terms propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, heptynyl, octynyl, nonynyl, decynyl etc. unless otherwise stated are meant unsaturated hydrocarbon groups with the corresponding number of carbon atoms and a triple bond, including all the isomeric forms.
By the term heteroalkyl are meant groups which are derived from the alkyl as herein- before defined in its widest sense by replacing, in the hydrocarbon chains, one or more of the groups -CH3 independently of one another by the groups -OH, -SH or -NH2, one or more of the groups -CH2- independently of one another by the groups -O-, -S- or -NH- , one or more of the groups
H
I
— c —
by the group
— N —
one or more of the groups =CH- by the group =N-, one or more of the groups =CH2 by the group =NH or one or more of the groups ≡CH by the group ≡N, while a total of not more than three heteroatoms may be present in one heteroalkyl, there must be at least one carbon atom between two oxygen atoms and between two sulphur atoms or between one oxygen and one sulphur atom and the group as a whole must have chemical stability.
A direct result of the indirect definition/derivation from alkyl is that heteroalkyl is made up of the sub-groups saturated hydrocarbon chains with heteroatom(s), heteroalkenyl and heteroalkynyl, and it may be further subdivided into straight-chain (unbranched) and branched. If a heteroalkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or polysubstituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying oxygen, sulphur, nitrogen and/or carbon atoms. Heteroalkyl itself as a substituent may be attached to the molecule both through a carbon atom and through a heteroatom.
The following are listed by way of example: dimethylamino methyl; dimethylaminoethyl (1- dimethylaminoethyl; 2-dimethyl- aminoethyl); dimethylaminopropyl (1-dimethylaminopropyl, 2-dimethylaminopropyl, 3-dimethylaminopropyl); diethylaminomethyl; diethylaminoethyl (1-diethylamino ethyl, 2-diethylamino ethyl); diethylaminopropyl (1-diethylaminopropyl, 2- diethylamino -propyl, 3 -diethylaminopropyl); diisopropylaminoethyl (1-diisopropylaminoethyl, 2-di- isopropylaminoethyl); bis-2-methoxyethylamino; [2-(dimethylamino-ethyl)-ethyl-amino]- methyl; 3-[2-(dimethylamino-ethyl)-ethyl-amino]-propyl; hydroxymethyl; 2-hydroxy- ethyl; 3-hydroxypropyl; methoxy; ethoxy; propoxy; methoxymethyl; 2-methoxyethyl etc.
Haloalkyl is derived from alkyl as hereinbefore defined in its broadest sense, by replacing one or more hydrogen atoms of the hydrocarbon chain independently of one another by halogen atoms, which may be identical or different. A direct result of the indirect definition/derivation from alkyl is that haloalkyl is made up of the sub-groups saturated hydrohalogen chains, haloalkenyl and haloalkynyl, and it may be further subdivided into straight-chain (unbranched) and branched. If a haloalkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or polysubstituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms. Typical examples are listed below:
-CF3; -CHF2; -CH2F; -CF2CF3; -CHFCF3; -CH2CF3; -CF2CH3; -CHFCH3; -CF2CF2CF3; -CF2CH2CH3; -CF=CF2; -CCl=CH2; -CBr=CH2; -CI=CH2; -C=C-CF3; -CHFCH2CH3; -CHFCH2CF3, etc.
Halogen encompasses fluorine, chlorine, bromine and/or iodine atoms.
Cycloalkyl is made up of the sub-groups monocyclic hydrocarbon rings, bicyclic hydrocarbon rings and spirohydrocarbon rings, while each sub-group may be further subdivided into saturated and unsaturated (cycloalkenyl). By unsaturated is meant that there is at least one double bond in the ring system, but no aromatic system is formed. In bicyclic hydrocarbon rings two rings are linked such that they share at least two carbon atoms. In spirohydrocarbon rings one carbon atom (spiroatom) is shared by two rings. If a cycloalkyl is substituted, it may be mono- or poly substituted independently of one another at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms. Cycloalkyl itself as a substituent may be attached to the molecule through any suitable position of the ring system. The following individual sub-groups are listed by way of example: monocyclic hydrocarbon rings, saturated: cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl; cyclohexyl; cycloheptyl etc.
monocyclic hydrocarbon rings, unsaturated: cycloprop-1-enyl; cycloprop-2-enyl; cyclobut-1-enyl; cyclobut-2-enyl; cyclopent-1-enyl; cyclopent-2-enyl; cyclopent-3-enyl; cyclohex-1-enyl; cyclohex-2-enyl; cyclohex-3-enyl; cyclohept-1-enyl; cyclohept-2-enyl; cyclohept-3-enyl; cyclohept-4-enyl; cyclobuta-1,3- dienyl; cyclopenta-l,4-dienyl; cyclopenta-l,3-dienyl; cyclopenta-2,4-dienyl; cyclohexa- 1,3-dienyl; cyclohexa-l,5-dienyl; cyclohexa-2,4-dienyl; cyclohexa-l,4-dienyl; cyclohexa- 2,5-dienyl etc.
bicyclic hydrocarbon rings (saturated and unsaturated): bicyclo[2.2.0]hexyl; bicyclo[3.2.0]heptyl; bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl; bicyclo[4.3.0]nonyl (octahydroindenyl); bicyclo[4.4.0]decyl (decahydronaphthalene); bicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl (norbornyl); (bicyclo[2.2.1]hepta-2,5-dienyl (norborna-2,5-dienyl); bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-enyl (norbornenyl); bicyclo[4.1.0]heptyl (norcaranyl); bicyclo- [3.1.1]heptyl (pinanyl) etc.
spirohydrocarbon rings (saturated and unsaturated): spiro[2.5]octyl, spiro[3.3]heptyl, spiro[4.5]dec-2-ene, etc.
Cycloalkylalkyl denotes the combination of the alkyl and cycloalkyl groups defined hereinbefore, in each case in their broadest sense. The alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by a cycloalkyl group. The linking of alkyl and cycloalkyl in both groups may be effected by means of any suitable carbon atoms. The sub-groups of alkyl and cycloalkyl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
Aryl denotes mono-, bi- or tricyclic carbon rings with at least one aromatic ring. If an aryl is substituted, the substitution may be mono- or polysubstitution in each case, at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon atoms, independently of one another. Aryl itself may be linked to the molecule as substituent via any suitable position of the ring system. Typical examples are listed below: phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl (2,3-dihydroindenyl), 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl; fluorenyl, etc.
Arylalkyl denotes the combination of the groups alkyl and aryl as hereinbefore defined, in each case in their broadest sense. The alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by an aryl group. The alkyl and aryl may be linked in both groups via any carbon atoms suitable for this purpose. The respective sub-groups of alkyl and aryl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
Typical examples are listed below: benzyl; 1-phenylethyl; 2-phenylethyl; phenylvinyl; phenylallyl etc.
Heteroaryl denotes monocyclic aromatic rings or polycyclic rings with at least one aromatic ring, which, compared with corresponding aryl or cycloalkyl, contain instead of one or more carbon atoms one or more identical or different heteroatoms, selected independently of one another from among nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen, while the resulting group must be chemically stable. If a heteroaryl is substituted, the substitution may be mono- or polysubstitution in each case, at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon and/or nitrogen atoms, independently of one another. Heteroaryl itself as substituent may be linked to the molecule via any suitable position of the ring system, both carbon and nitrogen. Typical examples are listed below. monocyclic heteroaryls: furyl; thienyl; pyrrolyl; oxazolyl; thiazolyl; isoxazolyl; isothiazolyl; pyrazolyl; imidazolyl; triazolyl; tetrazolyl; oxadiazolyl; thiadiazolyl; pyridyl; pyrimidyl; pyridazinyl; pyrazinyl; triazinyl; pyridyl-iV-oxide; pyrrolyl-JV-oxide; pyrimidinyl-JV-oxide; pyridazinyl-JV-oxide; pyrazinyl-7V-oxide; imidazolyl-iV-oxide; isoxazolyl-iV-oxide; oxazolyl-iV-oxide; thiazolyl- N-oxide; oxadiazolyl-iV-oxide; thiadiazolyl-7V-oxide; triazolyl-iV-oxide; tetrazolyl-N-oxide etc.
polycyclic heteroaryls: indolyl; isoindolyl; benzofuryl; benzothienyl; benzoxazolyl; benzothiazolyl; benzisoxazolyl; benzisothiazolyl; benzimidazolyl; indazolyl; isoquinolinyl; quinolinyl; quinoxalinyl; cinnolinyl; phthalazinyl; quinazolinyl; benzotriazinyl; indolizinyl; oxazolopyridyl; imidazopyridyl; naphthyridinyl; indolinyl; isochromanyl; chromanyl; tetrahydroisoquinolinyl; isoindolinyl; isobenzotetrahydrofuryl; isobenzotetrahydrothienyl; isobenzothienyl; benzoxazolyl; pyridopyridyl; benzotetrahydrofuryl; benzotetrahydro- thienyl; purinyl; benzodioxolyl; phenoxazinyl; phenothiazinyl; pteridinyl; benzothiazolyl; imidazopyridyl; imidazothiazolyl; dihydrobenzisoxazinyl; benzisoxazinyl; benzoxazinyl; dihydrobenzisothiazinyl; benzopyranyl; benzothiopyranyl; cumarinyl; isocumarinyl; chromonyl; chromanonyl; tetrahydroquinolinyl; dihydroquinolinyl; dihydroquinolinonyl; dihydroisoquinolinonyl; dihydrocumarinyl; dihydroisocumarinyl; isoindolinonyl; benzodioxanyl; benzoxazolinonyl; quinolinyl-JV-oxide; indolyl-iV-oxide; indolinyl-JV-oxide; isoquinolyl-iV-oxide; quinazolinyl-JV-oxide; quinoxalinyl-JV-oxide; phthalazinyl-JV-oxide; indolizinyl-iV-oxide; indazolyl-N-oxide; benzothiazolyl-JV-oxide; benzimidazolyl-N-oxide; benzo-thiopyranyl-^-oxide and benzothiopyranyl-^, iS-dioxide etc.
Heteroarylalkyl denotes the combination of the alkyl and heteroaryl groups defined hereinbefore, in each case in their broadest sense. The alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by a heteroaryl group. The linking of the alkyl and heteroaryl may be achieved on the alkyl side via any carbon atoms suitable for this purpose and on the heteroaryl side by any carbon or nitrogen atoms suitable for this purpose. The respective sub-groups of alkyl and heteroaryl are also included in the combination of the two groups. By the term heterocycloalkyl are meant groups which are derived from the cycloalkyl as hereinbefore defined if in the hydrocarbon rings one or more of the groups -CH2- are replaced independently of one another by the groups -O-, -S- or -NH- or one or more of the groups =CH- are replaced by the group =N-, while not more than five heteroatoms may be present in total, there must be at least one carbon atom between two oxygen atoms and between two sulphur atoms or between one oxygen and one sulphur atom and the group as a whole must be chemically stable. Heteroatoms may simultaneously be present in all the possible oxidation stages (sulphur -> sulphoxide -SO-, sulphone -SO2-; nitrogen -^ N-oxide). It is immediately apparent from the indirect definition/derivation from cycloalkyl that heterocycloalkyl is made up of the sub-groups monocyclic hetero-rings, bicyclic hetero-rings and spirohetero-rings, while each sub-group can also be further subdivided into saturated and unsaturated (heterocycloalkenyl). The term unsaturated means that in the ring system in question there is at least one double bond, but no aromatic system is formed. In bicyclic hetero-rings two rings are linked such that they have at least two atoms in common. In spirohetero-rings one carbon atom (spiroatom) is shared by two rings. If a heterocycloalkyl is substituted, the substitution may be mono- or poly- substitution in each case, at all the hydrogen-carrying carbon and/or nitrogen atoms, independently of one another. Heterocycloalkyl itself as substituent may be linked to the molecule via any suitable position of the ring system. Typical examples of individual sub-groups are listed below. monocyclic heterorings (saturated and unsaturated): tetrahydrofuryl; pyrrolidinyl; pyrrolinyl; imidazolidinyl; thiazolidinyl; imidazolinyl; pyrazolidinyl; pyrazolinyl; piperidinyl; piperazinyl; oxiranyl; aziridinyl; azetidinyl; 1 ,4-dioxanyl; azepanyl; diazepanyl; morpholinyl; thiomorpholinyl; homornorpholinyl; homopiperidinyl; homopiperazinyl; ho mo thiomorpholinyl; thiomorpholinyl-iS-oxide; thiomorpholinyl-iS'.iS'-dioxide; 1,3-dioxolanyl; tetrahydropyranyl; tetrahydrothiopyranyl; [l,4]-oxazepanyl; tetrahydrothienyl; homothiomorpholinyl-^^-dioxide; oxazolidinonyl; dihydropyrazolyl; dihydropyrrolyl; dihydropyrazinyl; dihydropyridyl; dihydro- pyrimidinyl; dihydrofuryl; dihydropyranyl; tetrahydrothienyl-5-oxide; tetrahydrothienyl- S, S-dioxide; homothiomorpholmyl-S'-oxide; 2,3-dihydroazet; 2H-pyrrolyl; 4H-pyranyl; 1 ,4-dihydropyridinyl etc.
bicyclic heterorings (saturated and unsaturated): 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 8-azabicyclo[5.1.0]octyl; 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl; 8-oxa-3-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 3,8-diaza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 2,5-diaza-bicyclo- [2.2.1]heptyl; l-aza-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl; 3,8-diaza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl; 3,9-diaza- bicyclo[4.2.1]nonyl; 2,6-diaza-bicyclo[3.2.2]nonyl etc.
spiro -heterorings (saturated and unsaturated): l,4-dioxa-spiro[4.5]decyl; l-oxa-3.8-diaza-spiro[4.5]decyl; and 2,6-diaza-spiro[3.3]heptyl; 2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonyl; 2,6-diaza-spiro[3.4]octyl; 3,9-diaza-spiro[5.5]undecyl; 2,8-diaza-spiro[4.5]decyl etc.
Ηeterocycloalkylalkyl denotes the combination of the alkyl and heterocycloalkyl groups defined hereinbefore, in each case in their broadest sense. The alkyl group as substituent is directly linked to the molecule and is in turn substituted by a heterocycloalkyl group. The linking of the alkyl and heterocycloalkyl may be achieved on the alkyl side via any carbon atoms suitable for this purpose and on the heterocycloalkyl side by any carbon or nitrogen atoms suitable for this purpose. The respective sub-groups of alkyl and heterocycloalkyl are also included in the combination of the two groups.
By the term "substituted" is meant that a hydrogen atom that is bound directly to the atom under consideration is replaced by another atom or another group of atoms. Alternatively substitution may take place at an atom if there are free electrons available at this atom. Depending on the starting conditions (number of hydrogen atoms, number of free electrons) mono- or polysubstitution may take place at an atom. Thus, for example, a free electron pair may be substituted by two monovalent substituents.
Bivalent substituents such as for example =S, =NR, =NOR, =NNRR, =NN(R)C(O)NRR, =N2 or the like may only be substituents at carbon atoms, while the bivalent substituent =0 may also be a substituent at heteroatoms. Generally speaking, substitution by a bivalent substituent may only take place at non-aromatic ring systems and requires exchange for two geminal hydrogen atoms, i.e. hydrogen atoms that are bound to the same carbon atom saturated before the substitution or for a free electron pair. Substitution by a bivalent substituent is therefore only possible at the group -CH2- or heteroatoms of a non-aromatic ring system.
In addition to this, the term "suitable substituent" denotes a substituent which is suitable, on the one hand, on account of its valency and on the other hand leads to a system with chemical stability.
Groups or substituents are frequently selected from among alternative groups/ substituents with a corresponding group designation (e.g. Ra, Rb etc). If a group of thus kind used repeatedly to define a compound according to the invention in different parts of the molecule, it should always be borne in mind that the respective uses are to be regarded as being totally independent of one another.
List of abbreviations
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
Features and advantages of the present invention will become apparent from the following detailed Examples, which illustrate the fundamentals of the invention by way of example, without restricting its scope:
Preparation of the compounds according to the invention
General
Unless stated otherwise, all the reactions are carried out in commercially obtainable apparatus using methods that are commonly used in chemical laboratories. Starting materials that are sensitive to air and/or moisture are stored under protective gas and corresponding reactions and manipulations therewith are carried out under protective gas (nitrogen or argon). Microwave reactions are carried out in an initiator made by Biotage or in an Explorer made by CEM in sealed containers (preferably 2, 5 or 20 mL), preferably with stirring.
Chromatography
For the preparative medium pressure chromatography (MPLC, normal phase) silica gel made by Millipore (name: Granula Silica Si-60A 35-70 μm) or C- 18 RP-silica gel (RP- phase) made by Macherey Nagel (name: Polygoprep 100-50 C 18) is used. The thin layer chromatography is carried out on ready-made TLC silica gel 60 plates on glass (with fluorescence indicator F-254) made by Merck. The preparative high pressure chromatography (HPLC) is carried out using columns made by Waters (named: XTerra Prep. MS C18, 5 μm, 30 x 100 mm or XTerra Prep. MS C18, 5 μm, 50 x 100 mm OBD or Symmetrie C18, 5 μm, 19 x 100 mm or Sunfire C18 OBD, 19 x 100 mm, 5 μm or Sunfire Prep C 10 μm OBD 50 x 150 mm or X-Bridge Prep Cl 8 5 μm OBD 19 x 50 mm), Agilent (named: Zorbax SB-C8 5 μm PrepHT 21.2 x 50 mm) and Phenomenex (named: Gemini Cl 8 5 μm AXIA 21.2 x 50 mm or Gemini C 18 10 μm 50 x 150 mm), the analytical HPLC (reaction control) is carried out using columns made by Agilent (named: Zorbax SB-C8, 5 μm, 21.2 x 50 mm or Zorbax SB-C8 3.5 μm 2.1 x 50 mm) and Phenomenex (named: Gemini Cl 8 3 μm 2 x 30 mm).
HPLC mass spectroscopy/UV spectrometry
The retention times/MS-ESI+ for characterising the examples are obtained using an HPLC- MS apparatus (high performance liquid chromatography with mass detector) made by Agilent. Compounds that elute at the injection peak have the retention time tRet. = 0.00.
The specifications for the apparatus are as follows:
Column: Waters, Xterra MS C 18, 2.5 μm, 2.1 x 30 mm, Part.No. 186000592 Eluant: A: H2O with 0.1 % HCOOH; B: acetonitrile (HPLC grade) Detection: MS: Positive and negative mode
Mass range: 120 - 900 m/z Fragmentor: 120
Gain EMV: 1; Threshold: 150; Stepsize: 0.25; UV: 254 nm; Bandwide: 1 Injection: Inj. Vol. 5 μL Separation: Flow 1.10 niL/min
Column temp.: 400C
Gradient: 0.00 min: 5 % solvent B
0.00 - 2.50 min: 5 % -» 95 % solvent B 2.50 - 2.80 min: 95 % solvent B
2.81 - 3.10 min: 95 % ■* 5 % solvent B
In addition, the following apparatus specification is used in some cases:
Column: Waters, Xterra MS C18, 2.5 μm, 2.1 x 50 mm, Part.No. 186000594 Eluant: A: deion. water with 0.1 % HCOOH; B: acetonitrile with 0.1 % HCOOH Detection: MS: Positive and negative mode
Mass range: 100 - 1200 m/z Fragmentor: 70
Gain EMV: Threshold: 1 mAU; Stepsize: 2 nm; UV: 254 nm as well as 230 nm; Bandwide: 8 Injection: Standard 1 μL
Flow: 0.6 niL/min Column temp.: 35 0C Gradient: 0.00 min: 5 % solvent B
0.00 - 2.50 min: 5 % -> 95 % solvent B 2.50 - 4.00 min: 95 % solvent B
4.00 - 4.50 min: 95 % ■* 5 % solvent B 4.50 - 6.00 min: 95 % solvent A
The compounds according to the invention are prepared by the methods of synthesis described hereinafter, in which the substituents of the general formulae have the meanings given hereinbefore. These methods are intended as an illustration of the invention, without restricting its subject matter and the scope of the compounds claimed to these examples. Where the preparation of starting compounds is not described, they are commercially obtainable or may be prepared analogously to known compounds or methods described herein. Substances described in the literature are prepared according to the published methods of synthesis. Compounds depicted in reaction schemes A to O can also be isolated in form of their salts and used as such . Such salts [e.g. halides, sulfonates (e.g. tosylates), ammonium salts etc.] are obtained whenever the free base or the free acid form is reacted with an appropriate acid or base, respectively.
Reaction scheme A
Figure imgf000037_0001
Z-1 A-1 A-2
The benzoic acids A-2 are obtained by methods known in the literature by diazotising 3-aminobenzoic acids Z-I in hydrochloric NaNO2 solution and reacting with sodium azide to form the aromatic azides A-I. The cycloaddition (for inserting the group R1) of the azides A-I is carried out using methods known from the literature using a corresponding alkyne Z-3, CuSO4 and sodium ascorbate and A-2 is obtained.
The alkynes Z-3 used to introduce the groups R1 are either commercially obtainable or are prepared from aldehydes Z-2 that are commercially obtainable or synthesised using methods known from the literature, e.g. by means of the Bestmann-Ohira reagent. Moreover, the alkynes used may also be prepared from aryl bromides and iodides and trimethylsilylacetylene which are commercially obtainable or synthesised by methods known from the literature by means of a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling (Sonogashira) and subsequent cleaving of the silyl protecting group. Experimental procedures for the synthesis of compounds in which R1 is a substituted imidazole utilizing halo imidazoles as intermediates are incorporated in here by reference to WO 2007/121390 and references cited therein. Other heteroaryls for R1 can be introduced analogously. Sonogashira couplings with halo pyridyls, halo imidazolyls, halo pyrazolyls, halo thiazolyls, halo pyrimidyls result in intermediates e.g. 2-cyclopropyl-l-methyl-5-trimethylsilanylethynyl- IH- imidazole, 2-cyclopropyl- 1 -methyl-4-trimethylsilanylethynyl- IH- imidazole, 2- trimethylsilanylethynyl-pyridine, 5-trimethylsilanylethynyl-pyrimidine, 1 ,5-dimethyl-4- trimethylsilanylethynyl-lH-pyrazole or 5-trimethylsilanylethynyl-thiazole. The benzoic acids A-2 that may be obtained directly by these reaction methods may be further modified in R1 in a manner known from the literature or analogous to the literature to obtain other benzoic acids A-2. Thus, for example, the groups R1 of directly accessible benzoic acids A-2, which consist of a halogen- or amino-substituted heteroaryl, may be converted by reactions of substitution (at the heteroaryl itself), alkylation, acylation or addition (at the amino group of the heteroaryl). In particular, transition metal-catalysed cross-coupling reactions (Ullmann, Buchwald-Hartwig, Sonogashira etc.) may be carried out on heteroarylbromides in R1 in order to introduce various substituents.
Procedure for synthesising A-Ia:
Figure imgf000038_0001
Z-1a A-1a
3-amino-4-methylbenzoic acid Z-Ia (10 g, 65.5 mmol) is taken up in 2N HCl (300 mL), cooled to 0 0C, mixed with a solution of sodium nitrite (5.42 g, 69 mmol) in 30 mL water and stirred for 30 min. Then a solution of sodium azide (4.73 g, 72 mmol) in 30 mL water is added dropwise, stirred for another 30 min after the addition has finished and then heated to RT. The precipitate of A-Ia formed is filtered off, washed repeatedly with water and then freeze-dried (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.61 min; MS (M+H)+ = 178).
Analogously to this procedure further azides A-I are obtained from the corresponding 3-aminobenzoic acid derivatives Z-I.
Alternatively, azides A-I can be obtained from 3-iodo-benzoic acids by reaction with sodium azide NaN3, L-proline, an appropriate base (such as Na2CO3) in the presence of a Cu(I) source (such as CuI or CuSO4) and a reducing agent (such as sodium ascorbate) in DMSO. In this way, 3-iodo-4-methyl-benzoic acid yields compund A-Ia. Procedure for synthesising A-2a:
Figure imgf000039_0001
Z-2a Z-3a A-2a
l,5-dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carbaldehyde Z-2a (2.803 g, 22.58 mmol) and the Bestmann- Ohira reagent (S. Muller et al. Synlett 1996, 521-522) (B-O, 5.964 g, 31.05 mmol) are placed in MeOH (75 mL) and combined with potassium carbonate (6.241 g, 45.16 mmol). After 3 d stirring at RT the azide A-Ia (2.5 g, 14.11 mmol) is added and stirred. Then sodium ascorbate (3.075 g, 15.52 mmol) dissolved in 12.5 mL water and 28.2 mL of a 0.1 M CuS(VsIn. (2.82 mmol) are added and the mixture is stirred for 3 d at RT. For working up the mixture is evaporated down under reduced pressure, mixed with water and adjusted to an acid pΗ (pΗ < 5) by the addition of 1 N hydrochloric acid solution. The precipitate formed is filtered off, washed with a little acetonitrile and dried in the vacuum dryer. A-2a may be used again directly or purified by RP-ΗPLC separation (ΗPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.59 min; MS (M+Η)+ = 298).
Procedure for svnthesising A-2b:
Figure imgf000039_0002
Z-3b A-2b
3-ethynylpyridine Z-3b (956 mg, 9.27 mmol) and azide A-Ia (1.64 g, 9.27 mmol) are taken up in 35 mL EtOH and 20 mL acetonitrile. Then 11.12 mL of sodium ascorbate solution (1.0 M, 11.12 mmol) and 18.53 mL CuSO4-sln. (0.1 M, 1.85 mmol) are added and the mixture is stirred for 3 d at RT. For working up the mixture is evaporated down under reduced pressure, mixed with water and adjusted to an acid pH (pH < 5) by the addition of 1 N hydrochloric acid solution. The precipitate formed is filtered off, washed with a little acetonitrile and dried in the vacuum dryer.
A-2b may be further used directly or purified by RP-HPLC separation (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.33 min; MS (M+H)+ = 281).
Procedure for svnthesising A2-c
Figure imgf000040_0001
3-bromo-5-fluoropyridine (6.29 g, 34.7 mmol) is placed in morpholine and heated for 5 d at 110 0C. After cooling to RT , DCM is added and the organic phase is extracted 3x with 2 N hydrochloric acid. The aqueous phase is adjusted to pH 4 with sodium hydroxide solution, again extracted 3x with DCM, the combined organic phases are dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down. The crude product (8.30 g, 23.9 mmol) is suspended in diisopropylamine, combined with CuI (471 mg, 2.47 mmol), tøftriphenyl- phosphino)palladium(II)-chloride (838 mg, 1.19 mmol) and trimethylsilyl-acetylene (6.74 mL, 47.7 mmol) and stirred at 100 0C for 30 min under protective gas. Then 1 N hydrochloric acid is added and the aqueous phase is extracted 3x with DCM. The combined organic phases are dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down and purified by normal phase chromatography (cyclohexane/EtOAc). After elimination of the solvents an intermediate product is obtained, which is the still TMS-protected alkyne Z-3c (HPLC- MS: tRet. = 2.14 min; MS (M+H)+ = 261).
TMS-protected alkyne Z-3c (1.98 g, 7.62 mmol) is taken up in MeOH (110 mL), combined with K2CO3 (1.75 g, 12.6 mmol) and stirred for 2 h at RT. Azide A-Ia (953 mg, 5.38 mmol), sodium ascorbate solution (1.0 M, 6.0 mL) and CuSO4 solution (0.1 M, 5.1 mL) are added successively and the mixture is stirred for 5 d at RT. The reaction mixture is evaporated down, diluted with water and the pH is adjusted with 1 N hydrochloric acid to pH 5. The precipitate pf A-2c (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.18 min; MS (M+H)+ = 366) is extracted for 30 min, filtered off and dried.
Analogously to these procedures, further benzoic acids A-2 are obtained from the corresponding A-I or Z-I and Z-3 intermediates/educts. The benzoic acids A-2 described are used in all the following reaction sequences (Schemes B to J) as synthesis components and in each case are coupled with anilines. These amide couplings are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of common coupling reagents, such as HATU or TBTU, for example, or the benzoic acids A-2 are activated using thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride or Ghosez reagent using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding acid chloride and are then reacted with the respective anilines (R2 -NH2). Reaction procedures by way of example are described therein.
Alternatively the 3-azidobenzoic acids A-I may also be coupled to the respective aniline (insertion of R2) and only then is the cycloaddition carried out (and optionally modification in R1) as shown in Scheme A.
Reaction scheme B-I
Figure imgf000042_0001
B-1 B-2 B-3
(X = H1 OH1 OMe, OEt) or H/NaH
Figure imgf000042_0002
Ia
Figure imgf000042_0003
Ib
Example compounds of type I (benzylethers or benzylamines in the m-position relative to the amide link -> R7) are prepared from benzylalcohols B-3 either by substitution of the corresponding benzyl chloride by means of an amine/hydroxylamine R9R10NH (type Ia -> benzylamine) or aminoalcohol R9R10N(CH2)yOH (or alkoxide, type Ib -^ benzyl-ether) or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R9R10NH (type Ia -> benzylamine). In the former case the benzyl alcohols B-3 are reacted for this purpose by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding benzyl chloride. In the latter case the benzylalcohols B-3 may be oxidised e.g. with MnO2, Dess-Martin-Periodinane or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in acetic acid medium with Na(OAc)3BH or Na(CN)BH3 and an amine R9R10NH using methods known from the literature to obtain compounds of type Ia. The amines/hydroxylamines/aminoalcohols used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The benzylalcohols B-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines B-2 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described above. The anilines B-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding carbonyl compounds B-I by nitrogenation, e.g. with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, cone, nitric acid, fuming nitric acid or nitrating acid and subsequent reductions with e.g. Pd/C and hydrogen in THF, methanol or ethanol or Fe and ammonium chloride in ethanol via various intermediate products Z. In some cases, already nitrogenated educts Z-4 are available from commercial sources. Other intermediate steps may also be integrated into the reaction sequence for synthesising the amines B-2, such as the modification of another functional group in the substituents R6 and/or R8. (Cf. synthesis of B-2a -» modification of R8)
a) Procedure for svnthesising B-2a:
Figure imgf000043_0001
EMa Z-4a Z-5a B-2a 2-hydroxy-5-ter£-butylbenzaldehyde B-Ia (9.0 g, 50.5 mmol) is taken up in acetonitrile (400 mL), cooled to -30 0C, mixed batchwise with NO2BF4 and stirred for 30 min. Then the reaction mixture is allowed to warm up to -15 0C within 1 h and stirred for a further 30 min at this temperature. The reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase is washed with sat. NaHCθ3 solution and sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-4a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.61 min; MS (M+H)+ = 224) is further reacted directly.
Nitro compound Z-4a (2.3 g, 10.1 mmol) is taken up in DMF (20 mL), combined with K2CO3 (2.4 g, 17.0 mmol) and stirred for 15 min. Then the suspension is combined with methyl iodide (0.94 mL, 15 mmol) and stirred overnight at RT. The reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase is washed twice with water and once with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-5a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 3.78 min; MS (M+H)+ = 238) is further reacted directly. Crude product Z-5a (1.05 g, 4.0 mmol) is taken up in a mixture of DCM and MeOH (1 :1, 10 mL), combined with NaBH4 (193 mg, 5.1 mmol) and stirred for 30 min at RT. The reaction mixture is combined with 2 N NaOH solution, extracted twice with DCM and the organic phase is washed with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-6a obtained (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 3.49 min; MS (M+H)+ = 240) is further reacted directly.
Crude product Z-6a (910 mg, 3.8 mmol) is taken up in EtOH (5 mL), combined with NH4Cl (110 mg, 1.9 mmol) and water (5 mL) and heated to 75°C. Then iron powder (2.1 g, 38 mmol) is added batchwise, the reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h and filtered to remove the excess iron powder. The solvent is eliminated by distillation using the rotary evaporator, the residue obtained is taken up in EtOAc and the organic phase is washed twice with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and yields product B-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.50 min; MS (M+H)+ = 210).
Analogously to these procedures, further anilines B-2 are obtained from the corresponding B-I intermediates/educts or the corresponding commercially obtainable educt.
b) Procedure for svnthesising B-3a:
Figure imgf000044_0001
Benzoic acid A-2a (524 mg, 1.8 mmol) is taken up in 4 niL DCM and 4 niL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.3 rnL, 3.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 1 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 8 mL DCM and combined with the aniline B-2a (405 mg, 1.9 mmol) and DIPEA (0.7 mL, 4.0 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of B-3a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.99 min; MS (M+H)+ = 489) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure, further benzylalcohols B-3 are obtained from the corresponding B-2- and A-2 intermediates.
c) Procedure for svnthesising Ia-I (benzyl chloride route, method A):
SOCl2, pyrrolidine
Figure imgf000045_0002
Figure imgf000045_0001
B-3a la-1
Benzylalcohol B-3a (30 mg, 0.06 mmol) is taken up in 2 mL DCM and combined with thionyl chloride (45 μL, 0.6 mmol) with stirring at RT. The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h at RT, evaporated down, the residue is taken up in DMF (300 μL), combined with pyrrolidine (100 μL, 1.2 mmol) and stirred for 2 h at RT. The volatile constituents are eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the residue is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of Ia-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.62 min; MS (M+H)+ = 542) are freeze-dried. Analogously to this procedure further example compounds of type Ia are obtained from the corresponding B-3 intermediates. d) Procedure for synthesising Ia-I (oxidation-reductive animation, method B):
AcOH,
Figure imgf000046_0002
Figure imgf000046_0001
B-3a la-1
Benzylalcohol B-3a (85 mg, 0.17 mmol) and MnO2 (168 mg, 1.7 mmol) are taken up in 2 mL chlorobenzene and heated to 600C for 3 h. Then the mixture is left to cool to RT, filtered through Celite and the filtrate is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 3 mL DCM, combined with pyrrolidine (48 μL, 0.59 mmol) and stirred for 15 min. Then glacial acetic acid (34 μL, 0.59 mmol) is added and Na(AcO)sBH (124.1 mg, 0.586 mmol) is added batchwise. The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of Ia-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.62 min; MS (M+H)+ = 542) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further example compounds of type Ia are obtained from the corresponding B-3 intermediates.
Reaction scheme B-II
Figure imgf000046_0003
Example compounds of type Ia (benzylamine in the w-position to the amide link -> R7) can also be prepared by a different sequence of the reaction steps shown in reaction scheme B-I (-> reaction scheme B-II), by first synthesising the anilinic benzylamines B-5 using methods known from the literature from the nitro compounds B-4 by reducing the two functional groups, protecting the amino function (e.g. by means of the Boc protective group), activating the benzyl alcohol (for example to obtain the chloride or mesylate) and reacting the benzyl alcohol thus activated with secondary amines and then reacting with the components A-2 by standard amide linking methods to form the end compounds Ia.
e) Procedure for svnthesising Ia- 198
Figure imgf000047_0001
A-2c B-5a la-198
The benzoic acid A-2c (166 mg, 0.43 mmol) is heated in thionyl chloride (2 mL) for 3 h at 65 0C. Then the thionyl chloride is eliminated using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in DCM (3.5 mL) and combined with the aniline B-5a (150 mg, 0.62 mmol) in DCM (3.5 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of Ia-198 (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.26 min; MS (M+H)+ = 592) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further example compounds of type Ia are obtained from the corresponding A-2 and B-5 intermediates.
Analogously to the reaction methods a) to e) described above for synthesising Examples Ia-I and Ia-198 the following Examples Ia-2 to Ia-266 (Table 1) or comparable further Examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
Figure imgf000053_0001
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000055_0001
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000059_0001
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000070_0001
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000072_0001
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000080_0001
* Example compound Ib-I is synthesised by treating the corresponding benzylalcohol B-3 analogously to the method for synthesising Ia-I (benzyl chloride route, see above) with thionyl chloride and instead of pyrrolidine adding sodium-2-dimethylaminoethoxide as nucleophil. Reaction scheme C
Figure imgf000081_0001
OH/NaH
Figure imgf000081_0002
Ma
Figure imgf000081_0003
lib
Example compounds of type II (benzylethers or benzylamines in the p -position to the amide link → R6) are prepared from benzylalcohols C-3 either by substitution of the corresponding benzyl chloride by means of an amine/hydroxylamine R9R10NH (type Ha → benzylamine) or aminoalcohol R9R10N(CH2)yOH (or alkoxide, type Hb → benzylether) or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R9R10NH (type Hb -> benzylether). In the former case the benzyl alcohols C-3 are reacted by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to form the corresponding benzyl chloride. In the latter case the benzylalcohols C-3 may be oxidised e.g. with MnO2, Dess- Martin-Periodinane or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in an acetic acid medium with Na(OAc)3BH or Na(CN)BH3 and an amine R9R10NH using methods known from the literature to obtain compounds of type Ha. The amines/hydroxylamines/aminoalcohols used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The benzylalcohols C-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines C-2 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described hereinbefore. The anilines C-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding carbonyl compounds C-I by nitrogenation, e.g. with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, cone, nitric acid, fuming nitric acid or nitrating acid and subsequent reductions with e.g. Pd/C and hydrogen in THF, methanol or ethanol or Fe and ammonium chloride in ethanol via various intermediate products Z. In some cases, already nitrogenated educts Z- 7 are available from commercial sources (cf. synthesis of C-2a). Other intermediate steps may also be integrated into the reaction sequence for synthesising the amines C-2, such as the modification of another functional group in the substituents R7 and/or R8.
a) Procedure for svnthesising C-2a:
Figure imgf000082_0001
Z-7a Z-8a C-2a
4-nitro-2-(trifluoromethyl)benzoic acid Z-7a (4.0 g, 17.0 mmol) is taken up in THF (80 mL) and NaBH4 (1.90 g, 50.2 mmol) is added batchwise. The reaction mixture is cooled to 0 0C, combined dropwise with boron trifluoride etherate (5.6 mL, 48.37 mmol) and stirred overnight at RT. It is cooled to 0 0C and combined with 1 M NaOH solution with stirring. Then THF is eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is extracted with EtOAc. The collected organic phases are washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-8a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.67 min; MS (M-H)+ = 220) is further reacted directly. Benzylalcohol Z-8a (1.0 g, 4.52 mmol) is taken up in EtOH (50 mL), combined with NH4Cl (120 mg, 2.24 mmol) and water (50 mL) and heated to 75 0C. Then iron powder (2.5 g, 44.8 mmol) is added batchwise, the reaction mixture is stirred for 15 min and filtered to remove excess iron powder. The solvent is eliminated by distillation using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and the organic phase is washed twice with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and yields the product C-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 0.18 min; MS (M+H)+ = 192).
Analogously to this procedure further anilines C-2 are obtained from the corresponding C-I intermediates/educts or the corresponding commercially obtainable educt.
b) Procedure for svnthesising C-3a:
Figure imgf000083_0001
C-2a C-3a
Benzoic acid A-2a (1.0 g, 3.36 mmol) is taken up in thionyl chloride (10 mL, 84 mmol), heated to 65 0C and stirred for 3 h. Then thionyl chloride is eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the reaction mixture is twice azeotroped with toluene. The crude product is taken up in DCM and at 00C added dropwise to a solution of C-2a (770 mg, 4.03 mmol) and pyridine (800 μL, 9.90 mmol) in DCM. After the addition is complete the mixture is stirred overnight at RT and the product C-3a is filtered off (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.92 min; MS (M+H)+ = 471).
Analogously to this procedure other benzylalcohols C-3 are obtained from the corresponding C-2-and A-2 intermediates. c) Procedure for synthesising IIa-1 (benzyl chloride route, method A):
SOCI2, isopropylamiπe
Figure imgf000084_0002
Figure imgf000084_0001
C-3a lla-1
Benzylalcohol C-3a (70 mg, 0.15 mmol) is taken up in 3 rnL DCM and combined with thionyl chloride (90 μL, 1.2 mmol) with stirring at RT. The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h at RT, evaporated down, the residue is taken up in DMF (400 μL), combined with isopropylamine (51 mg, 0.86 mmol) and stirred overnight at 40 0C. The reaction mixture is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of Ha- 1 (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.52 min; MS (M+H)+ = 512) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further example compounds of type Ha are obtained from the corresponding C-3 intermediates.
Analogously to the reaction methods a) to c) described above for synthesising Example Ha-I the following Examples Ha-2 to Ha-24 (Table 2) or comparable further Examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
The insertion of a benzylamine, benzylhydroxylamine or aminoalkylbenzylether side chain into the position of the group R7 or R6 as described in reaction scheme B and C can theoretically also be applied to an insertion into the position of the group R8 if a carbonyl compound the carbonyl functionality of which is in position R is used as the educt, analogously to B-I and C-I.
Reaction scheme D-I
Figure imgf000088_0002
D-1-2
1 <Pd>, NH
Jl Method B
Ph"%h
2 NHpOH1 NaOAc
Figure imgf000088_0003
D-2
D-3
Method A
2 reduction
Figure imgf000088_0004
D-1-1 Example compounds of type III (arylamine in the m-position to the amide link -> R7) are prepared from arylbromides D-3 either by a palladium- (Buchwald-Hartwig) or copper (Ullmann)-catalysed cross-coupling reaction with an amine or a nitrogen compound of general formula R9R10NH. The palladium- catalysed cross-couplings of D-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of common catalysts, such as for example biphenyl-2-yl-di-terr-butylphosphane and tris-(dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium, as well as a base, such as e.g. sodium-ter£-butoxide or caesium carbonate, in 1,4-dioxane or toluene with an amine R9R10NH. The copper-catalysed cross-couplings of D-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of Cu(I) salts, as well as bases, such as sodium carbonate and ligands, such as L-proline, e.g. in DMSO with a nitrogen compound of general formula R9R10NH. The compounds R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The arylbromides D-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines D-2 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described above. The anilines D-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding bromides D-l-1 or D-l-2 or also iodides, by nitrogenation, e.g. with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, cone, nitric acid, fuming nitric acid or nitrating acid and subsequent reductions with e.g. Pd/C and hydrogen in THF, methanol or ethanol or Fe and ammonium chloride in ethanol via various intermediate products Z. In some cases, already nitrogenated educts Z-9 are available from commercial sources. Other intermediate steps may also be integrated into the reaction sequence for synthesising the amines D-2, such as the modification of another functional group in the substituents R6 and/or R8.
a) Procedure for svnthesising D-2a (monobromide route, method A):
Figure imgf000090_0001
l-Bromo-2-chloro-3-trifluoromethyl-benzene D-I-Ia (4.9 g, 18.9 mmol) is taken up in cone, sulphuric acid (20 mL), cooled to 0 0C and combined with an ice-cold mixture of cone, nitric acid (25 mL) and cone, sulphuric acid (20 mL). After 3 h stirring at RT the reaction mixture is poured onto ice water, extracted with EtOAc, the organic phase is washed with sat. NaHCO3 solution and sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-9a obtained (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.14 min) is further reacted directly. Nitro compound Z-9a (5.0 g, 16.42 mmol) is taken up in EtOH (22 mL), combined with NH4Cl (440 mg, 8.21 mmol) and water (22 mL) and heated to 75 0C. Then iron powder (9.17 g, 164.23 mmol) is added batchwise, the reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h and filtered to remove excess iron powder. The solvent is eliminated by distillation using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and the organic phase is washed twice with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and yields aniline D-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.03 min; MS (M+H)+ = 276).
Analogously to this procedure further anilines D-2 are obtained from the corresponding D-l-1 intermediates/educts.
b) Procedure for synthesising D-2b (dibromide route, method B):
Figure imgf000090_0002
Dibromide D-l-2a (3.0 g, 9.38 mmol), sodium-tert-butoxide (1.26 mg, 13.13 mmol), BINAP (584 mg, 0.938 mmol) and tris-(dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium (85.9 mg, 0.094 mmol) are suspended in 60 mL toluene, combined with benzophenonimine (2.04 g, 11.25 mmol), and refluxed under an argon atmosphere for 3 d. Then the reaction mixture is filtered and the solvent is eliminated by distillation. The residue is taken up in MeOH (20 mL), combined with 1.8 g NaOAc and 1.2 g hydroxylamine hydrochloride, the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, diluted with EtOAc and filtered. The filtrate is evaporated down, taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product- containing fractions of D-2b (HPLC-MS: tRet = 2.15 min; MS (M-H)+ = 254/256) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further anilines D-2 are obtained from the corresponding D- 1-2 intermediates/educts.
c) Procedure for svnthesising D-3a:
Figure imgf000091_0001
D-2c D-3a
Benzoic acid A-2b (2.56 g, 9.16 mmol) is taken up in 45 mL DCM and 5 mL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.92 mL, 10.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 1 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 45 mL DCM and 15 mL THF and combined with the aniline D-2c (2.2 g, 9.16 mmol) as well as DIPEA (2.29 mL, 15.6 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The crude product is taken up in EtOAc and washed with 1 M NaOH solution. The collected organic phases are washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the product D-3a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.23 min; MS (M-H)+ = 503/505) is further reacted directly.
Analogously to this procedure further arylbromides D-3 are obtained from the corresponding D-2 and A-2 intermediates/educts.
d) Procedure for svnthesising HI-I (palladium-catalysed cross-coupling, method C):
hgand, pyrrolidine
1 ,4-dιoxane
Figure imgf000092_0002
Figure imgf000092_0001
D-3a MM
Arylbromide D-3a (70 mg, 0.14 mmol), sodium-terf-butoxide (55.2 mg, 0.56 mmol), biphenyl-2-yl-di-teτt-butylphosphane (16.6 mg, 0.06 mmol) and tris- (dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium (12.8 mg, 0.014 mmol) are suspended in 1.5 mL of 1,4-dioxane, combined with pyrrolidine (48 μL, 0.56 mmol), heated to 45 0C and stirred for 2 h. Then the reaction mixture is filtered and the solvent is eliminated by distillation. The residue is taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of IH-I (HPLC-MS: tRet = 2.19 min; MS (M+H)+ = 493) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further example compounds of type III are obtained from the corresponding D-3 intermediates.
e) Procedure for svnthesising III-2 (copper-catalysed cross-coupling, method D):
Figure imgf000092_0003
Arylbromide D-3b (50 mg, 0.096 mmol), sodium carbonate (43.7 mg, 0.4 mmol), L-proline (4.6 mg, 0.04 mmol) and copper(I)-iodide (3.8 mg, 0.02 mmol) are taken up in 900 μL DMSO under an argon atmosphere and combined with 4-methylimidazole (33 mg, 0.4 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated to 150 0C using a microwave reactor and stirred for 90 min. Then the reaction mixture is filtered and the reaction mixture is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of III-2 (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.76 min; MS (M+H)+ = 521) are freeze-dried.
Reaction scheme D-II
Figure imgf000093_0001
Example compounds of type III can also be prepared by a different sequence of the reaction steps shown in reaction scheme D-I (-> reaction scheme D-II), by first synthesising the anilines D-4 using methods known from the literature from the anilines D-2 by protecting the amino function (e.g. by means of the Boc protective group), followed by palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction (Buchwald-Hartwig reaction) and cleaving the Boc-protective group (e.g. with TFA or HCl) and then reacting with the components A-2 by standard amide linking methods to form the end compounds III.
f) Procedure for svnthesising D-4a
Figure imgf000093_0002
Aniline D-2c (9.00 mL, 63.0 mmol) and DMAP (0.77 g, 6.30 mmol) are placed in DCM (30 mL), cooled to 0 0C, combined dropwise with a solution OfBoC2O (34.3 g, 157 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) and stirred overnight at RT. The reaction mixture is evaporated down, taken up in EtOAc, washed with saturated NH4Cl solution and saturated NaCl solution, dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down. Some of the resulting crude product of the doubly Boc-protected aniline (14.0 g, 31.8 mmol) is taken up in 1,4-dioxane (300 mL), combined successively with sodium-tert-butoxide (9.45 g, 95.4 mmol), biphenyl-2-yl-di- te/t-butylphosphane (2.85 g, 9.54 mmol), tris-(dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium (2.91 g, 3.18 mmol) and N-methylpiperazine (14.1 mL, 127 mmol) and stirred for 4 h at 45 0C. The catalyst is filtered off, the filtrate is evaporated down, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and washed with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down. The crude product thus obtained (15.8 g, 30.8 mmol) is taken up in DCM (250 mL), combined dropwise with TFA (68.6 mL) and stirred for 2 h at RT. Then the reaction mixture is extracted 2x with 200 mL water. The combined aqueous phases are extracted with DCM, adjusted to pH 8 with NaOH and extracted 3x with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down. The residue is dissolved in isopropanol, combined with Et2O and HCl in Et2O (4 M), whereupon the HCl salt of D-4a (6.50 g; 22 mmol) (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.64 min; MS (M+H)+ = 260) is precipitated.
Aniline intermediates D-4 (Table 10; R' = - NH2), being another aspect of this invention, can be obtained in analogy with the synthesis of D-4a and process described in scheme L.
g) Procedure for svnthesising III-6
Figure imgf000094_0001
The benzoic acid A-2a (321 mg, 1.08 mmol) is placed in DCM (4 mL) and THF (4 mL), combined with oxalyl chloride (137 μl, 1.62 mmol) and a few drops of DMF, stirred for 2 h at RT and then evaporated down. The residue is taken up in DCM, combined with the aniline D-4a (280 mg, 1.08 mmol) and /Pr2EtN (425 μl, 2.48 mmol) and stirred overnight at RT. Then it is evaporated down, the residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of III-6 (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.58 min; MS (M+H)+ = 539) are combined and freeze-dried. Analogously to the reaction procedures a) to g) described above for synthesising Examples III-l, III-2 and III-6, the following Examples III-3 to III-5 and III-7 to III-197 (Table 3) or other comparable Examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000110_0001
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0001
Figure imgf000114_0001
Figure imgf000115_0001
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000120_0002
Reaction scheme E
Figure imgf000120_0001
Example compounds of type IV (arylamines in the p-position to the amide link → R6) and type V (arylamines in the o-position to the amide link -> R8) are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines E-2 or E-4 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described above. The anilines E-2 or E-4 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding fluoronitroaromatic compounds E-I or E-3 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an amine R9R10NH and subsequent reduction via the intermediate products Z-IO or Z-Il. The nucleophilic aromatic substitutions at E-I and E-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as for example NMP, DMSO or DMF. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The reaction conditions for the nucleophilic substitution and reduction are essentially independent of whether the starting material is an educt E-I (4-fluoronitrobenzene) or E-3 (2-fluoro-nitrobenzene). Therefore only the synthesis of E-2 and hence of examples of type IV will be described hereinafter. The reaction conditions can be applied to the synthesis of E-4 and Examples of type V.
a) Procedure for synthesising E-2a:
Figure imgf000121_0001
E-1a Z-10a E -2a
l-fluoro-4-nitro-2-trifluoromethylbenzene E-Ia (250 μL, 1.82 mmol) and DIPEA (443 μL, 30 mmol) are taken up in 1 mL NMP, combined with morpholine (160 μL, 1.84 mmol), the reaction mixture is stirred for 1.5 h at RT and for 4 h at 400C (-> intermediate product Z-IOa). Then it is diluted with 8 mL MeOH and transferred into a hydrogenation reactor. Pd/C (20 mg) is added and the mixture is stirred for 18 h under a H2 atmosphere (5 bar) at RT. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filtrate is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the product E-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 5.66 min; MS (M-H)+ = 245) is further reacted directly.
Analogously to this procedure further anilines E-2 and E-4 are obtained from the corresponding E-I- or E-3 intermediates/educts.
b) Procedure for svnthesising IV-I:
Figure imgf000122_0001
E-2a IV-1
Benzoic acid A-2b (50 mg, 0.178 mmol) is taken up in 1 rnL THF, combined with HATU (69 mg, 0.214 mmol) and DIPEA (68 μL, 0.395 mmol), and stirred for 20 min at RT. Then aniline E-2a (96.6 mg, 0.196 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT. The crude product is taken up in EtOAc and washed with water. The organic phase is washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is purified by preparative HPLC. The product- containing fractions of IV-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.03 min; MS (M+H)+ = 509) are freeze- dried.
Analogously to procedures a) and b) described hereinbefore, Examples IV-I to IV-21 and V-I to V- 18 (Table 4) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000127_0001
Reaction scheme F
Figure imgf000128_0001
A-2 activation
Figure imgf000128_0003
Figure imgf000128_0002
F-3 F-4 VII
Example compounds of type VI (arylethers in the /^-position to the amide link -> R6) and type VII (arylethers in the o-position to the amide link -> R8) are synthesised by a reaction of amide coupling of the anilines F-2 or F-4 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore. The anilines used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding fluoronitroaromatic compounds F-I or F-3 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an aminoalcohol R9R10N(CH2)yOH (or the corresponding alkoxide) and subsequent reduction via the intermediate products Z-12 and Z-13.
If the aminoalcohol R9R10N(CH2)yOH that is to be used is unobtainable or difficult to obtain, there is the alternative possibility of carrying out the nucleophilic substitution with a functionalised alcohol or a corresponding alkoxide and to generate an aldehyde function CHO from the second functional group via corresponding intermediate stages, in order to finally introduce the group NR9R10 by reductive amination.
The nucleophilic aromatic substitutions at F-I and F-3 are carried out using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF, using a base such as NaH or K2CO3. The aminoalcohols R9R10N(CH2)yOH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature. The reaction conditions for the nucleophilic substitution and reduction are essentially dependent on whether the starting material is an educt F-I (4-fluoronitrobenzene) or F-3 (2-fluoro-nitrobenzene). Therefore, only the synthesis of F-4 and hence of examples of type VII will be described hereinafter by way of example. The reaction conditions can be applied to the synthesis of F-2 and Examples of type VI.
a) Procedure for svnthesising F-4a:
Figure imgf000129_0001
F-3a Z-13a F-4a
l-fluoro-2-nitro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-benzene F-3a (250 μL, 1.82 mmol) is taken up in NMP (500 μL), combined with NaH (80 mg, 2.0 mmol) and 2-dimethylaminoethanol (158 mg, 1.82 mmol) and stirred overnight at RT. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel chromatography. The product-containing fractions are evaporated down and the residue (-> intermediate product Z-13a, HPLC-MS: tRet. = 0 min; MS (M+H)+ = 279) is taken up in 6 mL MeOH in a microwave vial. Pd/C (20 mg) and 4-methyl-l-cyclohexene are added and the mixture is stirred for 1 h at 1000C. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filtrate is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the product F-4a (HPLC- MS: tRet. = 0.56 min; MS (M+H)+ = 249) obtained is further reacted directly.
Analogously to this procedure further anilines F-2 and F-4 are obtained from the corresponding F-I- or F-3 intermediates/educts. b) Procedure for synthesising VII-I:
Figure imgf000130_0001
Benzoic acid A-2b (50 mg, 0.178 mmol) is taken up in 800 μL NMP, combined with HATU (73 mg, 0.225 mmol) and DIPEA (62 mg, 0.474 mmol) and stirred for 20 min at RT. Then the aniline F-4a (48.7 mg, 0.196 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT. The crude product is purified by preparative HPLC. The product- containing fractions of VII-I (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.45 min; MS (M+H)+ = 511) are freeze- dried.
Analogously to reaction methods a) and b) described above Examples VI-I to VI-2 and VII-I to VII-3 (Table 5) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000131_0001
Reaction scheme G
Figure imgf000132_0001
1 ^^ Br
2 reduction
Figure imgf000132_0002
VIII (y = 2)
Example compounds of type VIII (arylethers in the m-position to the amide link -> R7) are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the aniline G-2 and the corresponding, benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore. The anilines G-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding nitrophenols G-I by nucleophilic substitution at an aminoalkylhalide R9R10N(CH2)yX and subsequent reduction via the intermediate product Z-14. The aminoalkylhalides R9R10N(CH2)yX used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
Alternatively, certain example compounds of type VIII (y = 2) may be prepared by reductive animation of a corresponding aldehyde intermediate product Z-16 with an amine R9R10NH. The corresponding aldehydes Z-16 are obtained for example by ozonolysis of allylarylethers G-4 in methanolic medium, the reductive amination is carried out in acetic acid medium with Na(OAc)3BH or Na(CN)BH3 using methods known from the literature. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature. Allylarylethers G-4 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the aniline G-3 with the corresponding benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore, while aniline G-3 may be obtained by allylation of the nitrophenols G-I and subsequent reduction via the intermediate product Z-15.
The nucleophilic substitution to obtain the intermediate products Z-14 and Z-15 is carried out using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF, using a base such as e.g. caesium carbonate, NaH or K2CO3.
a) Procedure for svnthesising G-2a:
Figure imgf000133_0001
3-nitro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-phenol G-Ia (500 mg, 2.41 mmol), 3-dimethylaminopropyl- chloride hydrochloride (573 mg, 3.62 mmol) and caesium carbonate (3.93 g, 12.07 mmol) are taken up in DMF (10 mL) and heated to 120 0C for 60 min in a microwave reactor. Then the solvent is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and extracted twice with water. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the resulting intermediate product Z-14a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 0.67 min; MS (M+H)+ = 293) is further reacted directly.
The nitro compound Z-14a (700 mg, 1.80 mmol) is taken up in 15 mL EtOAc and transferred into a hydrogenation reactor. Pd/C (20 mg) is added and the mixture is stirred for 18 h under a H2 atmosphere (4 bar) at RT. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filtrate is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the product obtained G-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.88 min; MS (M+H)+ = 263) is further reacted directly.
Analogously to this procedure further anilines G-2 are obtained from the corresponding G-I intermediates/educts. b) Procedure for svnthesising VIII-I:
Figure imgf000134_0001
G-2a VIII-I
Benzoic acid A-2a (50 mg, 0.16 mmol) is taken up in 1 mL DCM and 1 rnL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.15 μL, 0.19 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 3 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 1 mL DCM, cooled to 0 0C in the ice bath and combined with the amine G-2a (50 mg, 0.16 mmol) as well as pyridine (40 μL, 0.49 mmol) and stirred overnight at RT. The crude product is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of VIII-I (HPLC MS: tRet. = 2.21 min; MS (M+H)+ = 542) are freeze-dried.
Further Example compounds VIII may be synthesised analogously to this procedure from the corresponding G-2 and A-2 intermediates/educts.
c) Procedure for svnthesising G-3a:
Figure imgf000134_0002
G-1a Z-15a G-3a
3-Nitro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-phenol G-Ia (2.5 g, 12.08 mmol) and potassium carbonate (2.00 g, 14.5 mmol) are taken up in acetone (10 mL), combined dropwise with allylbromide (1.15 mL, 13 mmol) and stirred overnight at 80 0C. Then the solvent is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and extracted twice with water. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z- 15a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.13 min) obtained is further reacted directly.
Nitro compound Z-15a (1.5 g, 6.07 mmol) is taken up in EtOH (30 mL), combined with NH4Cl (163 mg, 3.03 mmol) and water (30 mL) and heated to 75 0C. Then iron powder (3.39 g, 60.68 mmol) is added batchwise, the reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h and filtered to remove excess iron powder. The solvent is eliminated by distillation using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and the organic phase is washed twice with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and yields aniline G-3a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.95 min; MS (M+H)+ = 218).
Analogously to this procedure further anilines G-3 are obtained from the corresponding G-I intermediates/educts.
d) Procedure for svnthesising G-4a:
Figure imgf000135_0001
G-3a G-4a
Benzoic acid A-2a (1.5 g, 5.1 mmol) is taken up in 32 mL DCM and 10 mL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.49 mL, 5.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 3 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 15 mL THF, cooled to 00C in the ice bath and combined with the aniline G-3a (1.21 g, 5.5 mmol) as well as DIPEA (2.6 mL, 15.1 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the residue is taken up in EtOAc. The organic phase is washed with water, dilute KHSO4 solution and dilute NaHCO3 solution, dried on MgSO4 and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The product obtained G-4a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.06 min; MS (M+H)+ = 497) is reacted further without any additional purification.
Analogously to this procedure further allylarylethers G-4 may be synthesised from the corresponding G-3 and A-2 intermediates/educts.
e) Procedure for svnthesising VIII-IO:
Figure imgf000136_0001
G-4a VIII-10
Allylarylether G-4a (1.0 g, 2.01 mmol) is taken up in 40 mL DCM and 4 mL MeOH and cooled to -78 0C. Then a mixture of O3/O2 is piped through until the solution turns slightly blue. The reaction mixture is combined with dimethylsulphide (520 μL, 7.05 mmol), stirred overnight at RT, extracted with dilute NaHCO3 solution, dried on MgSO4 and concentrated by rotary evaporation. The intermediate product Z-16a obtained (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.83 min; MS (M+H)+ = 499) is further reacted directly.
The intermediate product Z-16a (100 mg, 0.2 mmol) is taken up in 3 ml DCM, combined with isopropylamine (15 mg, 0.20 mmol) and stirred for 15 min. Then glacial acetic acid (17 μL, 0.3 mmol) is added and Na(AcO)3BH (64 mg, 0.3 mmol) is added batchwise. The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product- containing fractions of VIII-10 (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.20 min; MS (M+H)+ = 554) are freeze-dried. Analogously to the methods a) to e) described above Examples VIII-I to VIII-10 (Table 6) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors.
Figure imgf000137_0001
Figure imgf000138_0002
Reaction scheme H
Figure imgf000138_0001
Example compounds of type IX (amidines in the m-position to the amide link -> R7) are synthesised from the anilines H-2 by amidine formation with the corresponding amide. The amides used are activated using methods known from the literature with acid chlorides, such as e.g. phosphoryl chloride or oxalyl chloride, and the reaction is carried out in ethereal solvents, such as dioxane or THF, for example. If desired the amides used may also serve as solvents.
The anilines H-2 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the 1,3-dianilines H-I and the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described hereinbefore. The dianilines used are commercially obtainable or may be synthesised using methods known from the literature.
To introduce amidine groups in the o- or/?-position to the amide link (-> R6, R8), the corresponding 1,2- or 1 ,4-dianilines may be used analogously instead of H-I. a) Procedure for svnthesising H-2a:
Figure imgf000139_0001
H-1a H-2a
Benzoic acid A-2a (2.0 g, 6.73 mmol) is taken up in 60 rnL THF, combined with HATU (2.38 g, 7.40 mmol) and DIPEA (2.59 mL, 15.47 mmol), and stirred for 20 min at RT. Then 5-(trifluoromethyl)-benzene-l,3-diamine H-Ia (1.18 g, 6.73 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT. The reaction mixture is concentrated by rotary evaporation, the crude product is taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of H-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.81 min; MS (M+H)+ = 456) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further anilines H-2 may be synthesised from the corresponding H-I and A-2 intermediates/educts.
b) Procedure for svnthesising IX-I
Figure imgf000139_0002
H-2a IX-1
Aniline H-2a (60.4 mg, 133 μmol) is taken up in 600 μL 1,4-dioxane in a microwave vial and combined with NMP (13 μL, 135 μmol) and POCI3. The reaction mixture is then heated to 100 0C in a microwave reactor and stirred for 1 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with some DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of IX-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.08 min; MS (M+H)+ = 537) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to the methods a) and b) described, Examples IX-I to IX-IO (Table 7) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors.
Figure imgf000140_0001
Figure imgf000141_0001
Reaction scheme I
Figure imgf000142_0001
Example compounds of type X (amines with Cy linkers in the m-position to the amide link -> R7) are obtained from compounds 1-3 either by substitution of the corresponding phenylalkyl chloride by means of an amine R9R10NH or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R9R10NH. In the former case the phenylalkyl- alcohols 1-3 are reacted by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding chlorides. In the latter case the phenylalkylalcohols 1-3 may be oxidised e.g. with DMP, MnO2 or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in an acetic acid medium with Na(OAc)3BH or Na(CN)BH3 and an amine R9R10NH using methods known from the literature to form compounds of type X. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The phenylalkylalcohols 1-3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the anilines 1-2 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding benzoic acid A-2 described hereinbefore. The anilines 1-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding carbonyl compounds 1-1, e.g. phenylacetic acids, by nitrogenation and subsequent reductions via various intermediate products Z.
a) Procedure for svnthesising I-2a;
OEt2,
Figure imgf000143_0002
Figure imgf000143_0001
Ma Z-17a I -2a
3-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylacetic acid I-la (8.0 g, 36.7 mmol) and tetramethylammonium nitrate (7.47 g, 54.87 mmol) are taken up in DCM (90 mL), combined with trifluorosulphonic acid anhydride (15.52 g, 55.0 mmol) in 30 mL DCM and stirred for 2 h at RT as well as for a further 12 h at 45°C. The reaction mixture is neutralised with sat. NaHCOs solution, the organic phase is washed with water, dried on Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The reaction mixture is further reacted directly as a mixture of regio isomers, including the intermediate product Z-17a (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.92/1.96 min; MS (M-H)+ = 262).
The mixture of regio isomers containing Z-17a (1.04 g, 3.50 mmol) is taken up in THF (10 mL), NaBH4 (198 mg, 5.23 mmol) is added batchwise, the mixture is cooled to 0 0C, boron trifluoride etherate (627 μL, 5.41 mmol) is added dropwise and the mixture is stirred overnight at RT. After cooling to 0 0C it is combined with 10 mL 1 M NaOH solution with stirring, the THF is eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is extracted with EtOAc. The organic phases collected are washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is purified by silica gel chromatography (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.74 min) and the isomerically pure phenylethylalcohol Z-18a is further reacted directly.
Intermediate product Z-18a (100 mg, 0.425 mmol) is taken up in EtOH (2.5 mL), combined with NH4Cl (11 mg, 0.211 mmol) and water (2.5 mL) and heated to 75°C. Then iron powder (235 mg, 4.21 mmol) is added batchwise, the reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h and the excess iron powder is filtered off. The solvent is eliminated by distillation using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and the organic phase is washed twice with sat. NaCl solution. The organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and yields product I-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.54 min; MS (M+H)+ = 206).
Analogously to this procedure further anilines 1-2 may be synthesised from the corresponding 1-1 intermediates/educts.
b) Procedure for synthesising I-3a:
Figure imgf000144_0001
l-2a l-3a
Benzoic acid A-2a (680 mg, 2.29 mmol) is taken up in 4 mL DCM and 4 mL THF, combined with oxalyl chloride (0.3 mL, 3.5 mmol) and one drop of DMF, stirred for 1 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in
10 mL DCM and combined with the aniline I-2a (492 mg, 2.40 mmol) as well as DIPEA (0.7 mL, 4 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of I-3a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.79 min; MS (M+H)+ = 485) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to this procedure further phenylalkylalcohols 1-3 are obtained from the corresponding 1-2 intermediates/educts. c) Procedure for svnthesising X-I (oxidation-reductive animation, method B):
Figure imgf000145_0001
l-3a X-1
Phenylalkylalcohol I-3a (226 mg, 0.467 mmol) is taken up in DCM, combined at RT with DMP (237 mg, 0.558 mmol) and stirred for 1.5 h. Then 1 g Na2S2O3 and 1 g NaHCO3 dissolved in 10 mL water are added to the solution and the reaction mixture is stirred for 20 min at RT. The organic phase is separated off and the aqueous phase is extracted twice more with DCM. The combined organic phases are again washed with sat. NaHCO3 solution, dried on MgSO4, filtered off, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z- 19a is ob, which is further reacted directly. Z- 19a (109 mg, 0.226 mmol) is taken up in 3 ml DCM, combined with dimethylamine (125 μL, 2.0 M in THF, 0.25 mmol) and stirred for 15 min. Then glacial acetic acid (20 μL, 0.34 mmol) is added and Na(AcO)3BH (72 mg, 0.34 mmol) is added batchwise. The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of X-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.15 min; MS (M+H)+ = 512) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to methods a) to c) described, Examples X-I to X-6 (Table 8) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors.
Figure imgf000146_0001
The introduction of an aminoalkyl side chain into the position of the group R7 in reaction scheme I can theoretically also be applied to an introduction into the position of the group R6 and R8 if carbonyl compounds whose carbonyl functionality is in position R6 or R8 are used as educt, analogously to 1-1.
Reaction scheme J
Figure imgf000147_0001
J-1 J -2 J -3 Xl
Example compounds of type XI are synthesised from the diaminopyridines J-3 by an amide coupling reaction with the corresponding benzoic acids A-2 described hereinbefore. The diaminopyridines J-3 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding dichloropyridines J-I by twofold nucleophilic aromatic substitution with amines R9R10NH and protected ammonia equivalents (e.g. benzylamine) via the intermediate stages Z-20 and J-2 and subsequent selective cleaving of protective groups. The nucleophilic aromatic substitutions are carried out in common solvents, such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF, with a base, such as pyridine or DIPEA, for example. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
a) Procedure for svnthesising J-3a:
Figure imgf000147_0002
Figure imgf000147_0003
J-2a J -3a 2,6-dichloro-4-trifluoromethylpyridine J-Ia (1.51 g, 6.99 mmol) is taken up in 1 mL pyridine, combined with benzylamine (1.0 mL, 9.16 mmol) and stirred overnight at 45 0C. The reaction mixture is diluted with water, combined with 2 N HCl and extracted three times with EtOAc. The organic phases collected are dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-20a obtained (HPLC- MS: tRet. = 2.44 min; MS (M+H)+ = 287) is further reacted directly.
Z-20a (165 mg, 0.573 mmol) is taken up in morpholine (1.02 g, 11.5 mmol) and heated to 1600C for 1 h in a microwave reactor. The precipitate is filtered off and the filtrate is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of J-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.40 min; MS (M+H)+ = 338) are freeze-dried.
Diaminopyridine J-2a (95 mg, 0.282 mmol) is taken up in 5 mL MeOH and 1 mL 1 N HCl and transferred into a hydrogenating reactor. Pd/C (20 mg) is added and the mixture is stirred for 18 h under an H2 atmosphere (4 bar) at RT. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filtrate is evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, J-3a is lyophilised from dioxane/HCl (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.74 min; MS (M+H)+ = 248) and further reacted directly.
Analogously to this procedure further diaminopyridines J-3 may be synthesised from the corresponding K-I -or K-2 intermediates/educts.
b) Procedure for svnthesising XI-I:
Figure imgf000148_0001
J-3a Xl -1
Benzoic acid A-2a (48 mg, 0.16 mmol) is taken up in 2 mL DCM and 2 mL THF, combined with 1 mL thionyl chloride, stirred for 3 h at RT and then evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The residue is taken up in 3 ml DCM and combined with the diaminopyridine J-3a (100 mg, 0.41 mmol) and pyridine (100 μL, 0.78 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of XI-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.31 min; MS (M+H)+ = 527) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to methods a) and b) described, Examples XI-I to XI-5 (Table 9) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000150_0001
Reaction scheme K
Figure imgf000150_0002
Anilines K-5 are obtained using methods known from the literature, by reacting protected m-nitroanilines K-2 by reduction of the nitro group, diazotisation in hydrochloric NaNO2 solution and reaction with sodium azide via the intermediate product Z-21 to form the aromatic azides K-3. The protected nitroanilines K-2 are obtained from the free nitroanilines K-I by introducing the corresponding protective group (PG). The protective groups used may be any amino protective groups that are stable under the following reaction conditions and are known for example from peptide synthesis, preferably the group Cbz (introduced using the acid chloride Cbz-Cl). The cycloaddition (in order to introduce the group R1) of the azides K-3 is carried out by methods known from the literature using a corresponding alkyne Z-3, CuSO4 and sodium ascorbate and K-4. The protected anilines K-4 are deprotected in the last step by cleaving the protective group under the respective conditions known from the literature to obtain the free aniline K-5 (Cbz ■* Pd/C, H2).
The alkynes Z-3 used to introduce the groups R1 are either commercially obtainable or are prepared from aldehydes Z-2 that are commercially obtainable or synthesised by methods known from the literature, e.g. using the Bestmann-Ohira reagent. In addition, the alkynes used may also be prepared from the aryl bromides and iodides and trimethylsilylacetylene that are commercially obtainable or synthesised using methods known from the literature by palladium-catalysed cross-coupling (Sonogashira) and subsequent cleaving of the silyl protective group. Experimental procedures for the incorporation of substituted imidazoles as groups R1 (via halo imidazoles) are disclosed in WO 2007/121390 and references cited therein. Analogously, other heteroaryls can be incorporated. Sonogashira couplings with halo pyridyls, halo imidazolyls, halo pyrazolyls, halo thiazolyls, halo pyrimidyls result in intermediates like e.g. 2-cyclopropyl-l-methyl-5-trimethylsilanylethynyl- IH- imidazole, 2-cyclopropyl- 1 -methyl-4-trimethylsilanylethynyl- IH- imidazole,
2-trimethylsilanylethynyl-pyridine, 5-trimethylsilanylethynyl-pyrimidine, 1 ,5-dimethyl-4- trimethylsilanylethynyl- 1/f-pyrazole and 5-trimethylsilanylethynyl-thiazole.
The anilines K-5 that are obtainable directly by these reaction methods may then be further modified in R1 in a manner known from the literature or analogously to the literature to obtain further anilines K-5. Thus, for example, the groups R1 of directly obtainable anilines K-5, consisting of a halogen- or amino-substituted heteroaryl, can be modified by reactions of substitution (at the heteroaryl itself), alkylation, acylation or addition (at the amino group of the heteroaryls). In particular, transition metal-catalysed cross-coupling reactions (Ullmann, Buchwald-Hartwig, Sonogashira etc.) may be carried out on heteroarylbromides in R1 in order to introduce various substituents. Procedure for svnthesising K-3a
1 H2, Ra-Ni
Figure imgf000152_0001
K-1a K-2a K-3a
4-methyl-3-nitroaniline K-Ia (51.0 g, 335 mmol) is taken up in THF (300 mL), combined with DIPEA (73.6 mL, 402 mmol), benzyl chloroformate (52.4 mL, 369 mmol) dissolved in 50 mL THF is added while cooling with ice and the mixture is stirred overnight at RT. The reaction mixture is mixed with water and the THF is eliminated using the rotary evaporator. The crude product is filtered off, recrystallised from methano I/water (25:1) and K-2a is obtained and further reacted directly (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.25 min; MS (M-H)+ = 285). The protected nitroaniline K-2a (5.00 g, 17.5 mmol) is taken up in methanol (30 mL), mixed with Raney nickel (500 mg) and stirred under a hydrogen pressure of 8 bar for 18 h at RT. The reaction mixture is then filtered through a silica gel frit, the filtrate is evaporated down, recrystallised from n-pentane and the monoprotected phenylenediamine Z-21a is obtained and further reacted directly (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.86 min; MS (M+H)+ = 257).
The protected phenylenediamine Z-21a (3.90 g, 15.2 mmol) is taken up in 2N HCl (300 mL), cooled to 0 0C, combined with a solution of sodium nitrite (1.58 g, 22.8 mmol) in 50 mL water and stirred for 30 min. Then a solution of sodium azide (2.18 g, 33.5 mmol) in 30 mL water is added dropwise, after the addition is complete the mixture is stirred for another 30 min and then heated to RT. The precipitate of K-3a formed is filtered off, washed repeatedly with water and then freeze-dried (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.35 min; MS (M-H)" = 281).
Analogously to this procedure further azides K-3 are obtained from the corresponding 3 -nitro anilines K-I. Procedure for synthesising K-4a
Figure imgf000153_0001
Z-2a Z-3a K-4a
l,5-dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carbaldehyde Z-2a (2.8 g, 23.0 mmol) and the Bestmann- Ohira reagent (B-O, 6.0 g, 31.0 mmol) are placed in MeOH (100 mL) and combined with potassium carbonate (6.27 g, 45.3 mmol). After 12 h stirring at RT the azide K-4a (4.0 g, 14.2 mmol) is added and stirred in. 16 mL of a 1 M sodium ascorbate sin. (16 mmol) and 28.4 mL of a 0.1M CuSO4 sin. (2.84 mmol) are added and the mixture is stirred for 3 d at 40 0C. For working up the mixture is evaporated down under reduced pressure, mixed with water and adjusted to an acid pH by the addition of 2M HCl sin.. The mixture is then extracted several times with EE, the combined organic phases are dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down under reduced pressure. K-4a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.01 min; MS (M+H)+ = 403) is obtained by chromatographic purification by silica gel chromatography.
Analogously to this procedure other protected anilines K-4 are obtained from the corresponding K-3- or Z-2 intermediates/educts.
Procedure for svnthesising K-5a
Figure imgf000153_0002
K-4a K-5a
The Cbz-protected aniline K-4a (4.0 g, 9.94 mmol) is taken up in 100 mL THF, mixed with Pd/C (2.0 g) and water (2 mL) and stirred overnight under a hydrogen pressure of 8 bar at 600C. The reaction mixture is filtered through a silica gel frit, the filtrate is evaporated down and the residue of K-5a is taken up in diethyl ether, filtered off and dried (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.46 min; MS (M+H)+ = 269).
The anilines K-5 described are used as synthesis components in all the following reaction sequences (schemes L and M) and in each case are coupled to benzoic acids (introduction of R2). These amide couplings are carried out using methods known from the literature with the aid of common coupling reagents, such as e.g. HATU or TBTU, or the respective benzoic acids are activated by thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride or Ghosez reagent using methods known from the literature to form the corresponding acid chloride and then reacted with the anilines K-5. Examples of reaction methods can be found there.
Alternatively, first of all the m-nitroanilines K-I may be coupled with benzoic acids (introduction of R2) and only then are the reduction, diazotisation, introduction of the azide group and cycloaddition according to Scheme K carried out. Using this sequence it is possible to avoid using a protective group (PG).
Reaction scheme L-I
Figure imgf000154_0001
1 R9R10NH
2 NaOH
Figure imgf000154_0002
Example compounds of type XII (arylamines in the m-position to the amide link -> R7), prepared according to general Scheme L, have an inverse amide bond, in relation to those of type III (reaction scheme D).
Example compounds of type XII are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the benzoic acids L-3 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding anilines K-5 described hereinbefore. The benzoic acids L-3 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised by methods known from the literature from the corresponding benzoic acids L-I or benzonitriles L-2. The compounds XII according to the invention thus obtained may be modified in R1 (analogously to the anilines K-5 described above) to obtain other compounds XII according to the invention (cf. explanations relating to reaction scheme K).
The benzoic acids L-3 are prepared starting from arylhalides L-I by a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction (Buchwald-Hartwig) with an amine R9R10NH using methods known from the literature with the aid of common catalysts, such as for example biphenyl- 2-yl-di-tert-butylphosphane and tris-(dibenzylidene-acetone)-palladium, as well as a base, such as sodium- tert-butoxide or caesium carbonate, in 1,4-dioxane or toluene. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature. Alternatively benzoic acids L-3 may also be synthesised starting from the corresponding fluorobenzonitriles L-2 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an amine or a nitrogen compound of general formula R9R10NH using methods known from the literature in common solvents, such as e.g. dimethylacetamide, NMP, DMSO or DMF. The substitution to obtain the intermediate product Z-22 in this case follows a nitrile saponification. The compounds R9R10NH are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature
a) Procedure for synthesising L-3a (palladium-catalysed cross-coupling):
Figure imgf000155_0001
m-Bromobenzoic acid L-Ia (500 mg, 1.86 mmol), sodium-tert-butoxide (737 mg, 7.44 mmol), biphenyl-2-yl-di-fe/t-butylphosphane (444 mg, 1.49 mmol) and tris- (dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium (170 mg, 0.186 mmol) are suspended in 4 mL 1,4-dioxane, combined with ΛWAf'-trimethyl-ethylenediamine (760 mg, 7.44 mmol), heated to 450C and stirred for 3 h. Then the reaction mixture is filtered and the solvent is eliminated by distillation. The residue is taken up in water and the precipitate is filtered off. The filtrate is acidified with 1 N HCl and the product-containing precipitate (HPLC- MS: tRet. = 0 min; MS (M+H)+ = 291) is filtered off and freeze-dried.
b) Procedure for synthesising L-3b (aromatic nucleophilic substitution):
Figure imgf000156_0001
L-2a Z-22a L-3b
A mixture of 3-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-benzonitrile L-2a (17 g, 89 mmol) and 2-methylimidazole (22.2 g, 270 mmol) in 80 mL dimethylacetamide is stirred for 24 h at 145 0C. Then the solvent is eliminated by distillation and the residue is taken up in EtOAc. The solution is washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the intermediate product Z-22a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 3.16 min; MS (M+H)+ = 252) is further reacted directly. Intermediate product Z-22a (25 g, 99 mmol) is taken up in 1,4-dioxane (400 mL), combined dropwise with 1 N NaOH solution (400 mL) and stirred for 20 h at 950C. Then the solvent is eliminated by distillation. The residue is neutralised with 1 N HCl and extracted with n-butanol. The combined organic phases are dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and das crude product of L-3b is washed with acetone and a little water (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 3.56 min; MS (M+H)+ = 271).
Benzoic acid intermediates L-3 (Table 10; R' = - COOH), being another aspect of this invention, can be obtained in analogy with the procedures a) or b)
Benzoic acids L-3 can be used as starting materials for the synthesis of anilines D-4 (Table 10; R' = - NH2), which are intermediates of compounds of type III (reaction scheme D-II). For that purpose, benzoic acids L-3 are converted to the corresponding acid azides by reaction with diphenyl phosphoryl azide (DPPA). The Curtius rearrangement/ degradation reaction is carried out under heating in a toluene/base/alcohol solvent system; in which the isocyanate generated initially, is scavenged by the alcoholic co-solvent to yield the corresponding carbamate. Preferred alcohols used as co-solvents allowing for an easy cleavage of the carbamate to yield the free anilines D-4 (see also Ninomiya et al., Tetrahedron 1974, Vol. 30, 2151-2157 and Lebel et al., Org. Lett. 2006, Vol. 8, No. 25, 5717-5720)., include ^BuOH or te/t-amylalcohol. The carbamates in Table 10 are a further aspect of this invention.
Figure imgf000157_0001
Figure imgf000158_0001
Figure imgf000159_0001
Figure imgf000160_0001
R' = -NH2 for anilines D-4, R' = -COOH for benzoic acids L-3, R' = -NHBoc or R' = -NHC(O)OCH(CHs)2C2H5 for carbamates.
c) Procedure for synthesising XII-I:
Figure imgf000160_0002
L-3a XII-1
Benzoic acid L-3a (1.00 g, 3.45 mmol) is taken up in 10 rnL NMP, combined with HATU (1.11 g, 3.45 mmol) and DIPEA (891 mg, 6.89 mmol) and stirred for 40 min at RT. Then aniline K-5a (925 mg, 3.45 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT. The crude product is taken up in EtOAc and washed with water. The combined organic phases are washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of XII-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.19 min; MS (M+H)+ = 541) are freeze-dried.
Reaction scheme L-II
Figure imgf000161_0001
X = I1 Br, Cl
L-1
K-5 activation
Figure imgf000161_0002
L-4 XII
Example compounds of type XII can also be prepared by altering the sequence of the reaction steps shown in reaction scheme L-I (-> reaction scheme L-II), by first synthesising the amide coupling products L-4 using methods known from the literature from the benzoic acids L-I and the anilines K-5 and then reacting them with an amine R9R10NH by a palladium-catalysed cross-coupling reaction (Buchwald-Hartwig) using methods known from the literature with the aid of common catalysts, such as for example biphenyl-2-yl-di-ter^-butylphosphane and tris-(dibenzylidene-acetone)-palladium, and a base, such as sodium-tert-butoxide or caesium carbonate, in 1,4-dioxane or toluene, to obtain the end compounds XII. Preferably, bromine or iodine compounds are used, while corresponding chlorine compounds may also be used. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The compounds XII according to the invention obtained in this way may be modified in R1 (analogously to the anilines K-5 described above) to form other compounds according to the invention XII (cf. explanations relating to reaction scheme K). d) Procedure for synthesising L-Ib
Figure imgf000162_0001
Z-23a L-1b
NEt3 (4.69 mL, 33.8 mmol) is added to 3,5-dibromobenzylalcohol (3.00 g, 11.3 mmol) in THF (100 mL), then at 0 0C methanesulphonic acid chloride (1.75 mL, 22.6 mmol) is slowly added dropwise and the mixture is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is evaporated down, the residue is taken up in 1 M NaOH and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated NaCl solution, dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator.
The activated benzylalcohol thus obtained is taken up as a crude product (4.09 g, 11.9 mmol) in MeCN (30 mL), mixed with KCN (3.88 g, 59.5 mmol) and crown ether (18 K-6; 315 mg, 1.19 mmol) and stirred for 18 h at RT. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted 2x with DCM. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated NaCl solution, dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The nitrile thus obtained is placed as a crude product (3.27 g, 11.9 mmol) in THF (120 mL), cooled to -78°C, mixed with MeI (1.64 mL, 26.2 mmol), potassium- tert.- butoxide (3.13 g, 26.2 mmol) and crown ether (18-K-6; 635 mg, 2.38 mmol) and stirred for 30 min at this temperature. The reaction mixture is left to thaw overnight at RT, combined with saturated NH4Cl solution (100 mL) and the aqueous phase is extracted 3x with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator.
The nitrile Z-23a thus obtained (2.00 g, 6.60 mmol) is taken up in THF (50 mL), cooled to -40 0C, combined with isopropylmagnesium chloride/LiCl solution (0.9 M; 11.5 mL, 9.90 mmol) and stirred overnight at this temperature. Then CO2 gas is piped through the reaction mixture and in the mean time the mixture is allowed to thaw to RT. EtOAc is added and the mixture is extracted 3x with 1 M NaOH. The combined aqueous phase is acidified with cone, hydrochloric acid and extracted 3x with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The benzoic acid L-Ib thus obtained is used in the following reactions without any further purification.
e) Procedure for svnthesising L-4a
Figure imgf000163_0001
L-1b L-4a
The benzoic acid L-Ib (725 mg, 2.70 mmol) is placed in toluene (10 mL), mixed with SOCl2 (0.37 mL, 5.14 mmol) and refluxed for 2 h. The mixture is left to cool, the aniline K-5a (725 mg, 2.70 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (1.4 mL, 8.11 mmol; dissolved in 5 mL toluene) are added and the mixture is refluxed for 1 h. It is diluted with 2 M NaOH, cooled to RT and the aqueous phase is extracted 3x with DCM. The combined organic phases are washed with IN hydrochloric acid and saturated NaCl solution, dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The crude product is taken up in EtOAc and combined with cyclohexane, whereupon L-4a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.14 min; MS (M+H)+ = 518/520) is precipitated as a solid.
f) Procedure for svnthesising XII-40
Figure imgf000163_0002
The bromine compound L-4a (100 mg, 0.19 mmol), sodium-tøt-butoxide (76.5 mg; 0.77 mmol), biphenyl-2-yl-di-feτt-butylphosphane (23.0 mg; 77.2 μmol) and tris(dibenzylideneacetone)-palladium (17.6 mg, 19.3 μmol) are suspended in 2 mL of 1,4-dioxane, combined with 1-methylhomopiperazine, heated to 450C and stirred for 3 h. Then the reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, washed with MeCN and evaporated down. The residue is taken up in a little DCM and chromatographed on silica gel. The product-containing fractions of XII-40 (HPLC-MS: tRet = 2.00 min; MS (M+H)+ = 552) are evaporated down and freeze-dried.
Analogously to the methods a) - g) described above Examples XII-I to XII-66 (Table 11) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000165_0001
Figure imgf000166_0001
Figure imgf000167_0001
Figure imgf000168_0001
Figure imgf000169_0001
Figure imgf000170_0001
Figure imgf000171_0001
Figure imgf000172_0001
Figure imgf000173_0002
Reaction scheme M
Figure imgf000173_0001
Example compounds of type XIII (arylamines in the p-position to the amide link → R6) and type XVI (arylamines in the o-position to the amide link → R8), which are prepared according to general scheme M, have an inverse amide bond, compared with the compounds of type IV or V (reaction scheme E). Example compounds of type XIII and type XIV are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the benzoic acids M-2 or M-4 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding anilines K-5 described hereinbefore. The benzoic acids M-2 or M-4 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding fluorobenzoic acids M-I or M-3 by nucleophilic aromatic substitution with an amine R9R10NH in common solvents such as e.g. NMP, DMSO or DMF. The amines R9R10NH used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The reaction conditions for the nucleophilic substitution are essentially independent of whether the starting material is an educt M-I (4-fluorobenzoic acid) or M-3
(2-fluorobenzoic acid). Therefore the following is a description by way of example of only the synthesis of M-2 and hence of examples of type XIII. The reaction conditions can also be applied to the synthesis of M-4 and examples of type XVI.
Alternatively to the educts M-I and M-3, L-1-analogous o- and/?-bromobenzoic acids which are functionalised by palladium-catalysed cross-couplings (Buchwald-Hartwig) with the amines R9R10NH may also be used.
a) Procedure for svnthesising M-2a:
Figure imgf000174_0001
In a microwave vial 4-fluoro-3-(trifluoromethyl)-benzoic acid M-Ia (150 mg, 0.721 mmol) and N-(2-aminoethyl)pyrrolidine (99 mg, 0.865 mmol) are taken up in 1.5 mL DMSO. The reaction mixture is heated to 1200C using a microwave reactor, stirred for 4 h, then diluted with EtOAc, washed twice with water and with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The crude product is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of M-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 0 min; MS (M+H)+ = 303) are freeze-dried. Analogously to this procedure further benzoic acids M-2 and M-4 are obtained from the corresponding M-I or M-3 intermediates/educts.
b) Procedure for svnthesising XIII-I:
Figure imgf000175_0001
M-2a XIIM
Benzoic acid M-2a (40 mg, 0.132 mmol) is taken up in 500 μL NMP, combined with HATU (43 mg, 0.132 mmol) and DIPEA (20.5 mg, 0.159 mmol) and stirred for 20 min at RT. Then the aniline K-5a (51 mg, 0.132 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT. The reaction mixture is filtered and the residue is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of XIII-I (HPLC-MS: tRet = 1.58 min; MS (M+H)+ = 553) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to reaction methods a) and b) described above, Examples XIII-2 and XIV-I to XIV-3 (Table 12) or comparable further examples may also be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000176_0001
Reaction scheme N-I
Figure imgf000177_0001
1 SOCI,
Method A 2 R9R10NH or R9R10N(CH2)yOH/NaH or
1 MnO2
Method B 2 R9R10NH, Na(AcO)3BH, AcOH
Figure imgf000177_0002
XVa
Figure imgf000177_0003
Example compounds of type XV (benzylethers or benzylamines in the w-position to the amide link -> R7), prepared according to general Scheme N-I, have an inverse amide bond, compared with the compounds of type I (reaction scheme B-I).
Example compounds of type XV are prepared from benzylalcohols N-3 either by substitution of the corresponding benzyl chloride by means of an amine/hydroxylamine R9R10NH (type XVa -» benzylamine) or aminoalcohol R9R10N(CH2)yOH (or alkoxide, type XVb -^ benzylether) or by reductive amination of a corresponding aldehyde with an amine R9R10NH (type XVa -> benzylamine). In the former case the benzyl alcohols N-3 are reacted for this purpose by means of thionyl chloride using methods known from the literature to obtain the corresponding benzyl chloride. In the latter case the benzylalcohols N-3 may be oxidised e.g. with MnO2, Dess-Martin-Periodinane or other common oxidising agents to form the corresponding aldehydes and then reacted in acetic acid medium with Na(OAc)3BH or Na(CN)BH3 and an amine R9R10NH using methods known from the literature to obtain compounds of type XVa. The amines/hydroxylamines/aminoalcohols used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature.
The benzylalcohols N -3 are synthesised by an amide coupling reaction of the isophthalic acid monoesters N-2 (in order to introduce the group R2) and the corresponding anilines K-5 described above, and subsequent reduction of the ester function. The isophthalic acid monoesters N-2 used are commercially obtainable or are synthesised using methods known from the literature from the corresponding isophthalic acids N-I by esterifϊcation, e.g. with thionyl chloride in MeOH and subsequent monosaponification, e.g. with NaOH in MeOH via various intermediate products Z.
a) Procedure for svnthesising N-3a:
Figure imgf000178_0001
5-te/t-butyl-isophthalic acid N-Ia (5.00 g, 22.5 mmol) is taken up in 13 mL MeOH, cooled to -15 0C and thionyl chloride is added dropwise. After the addition is complete, the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT and then refluxed for 24 h. The volatile constituents are eliminated using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in EtOAc and washed with sat. NaHCO3 solution. The organic phase is dried with MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down and the intermediate product Z-24a thus obtained (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.30 min; MS (M+H)+ = 251) is further reacted directly.
Intermediate product Z-24a (5.54 g, 22.15 mmol) is taken up in 45 mL acetone and at RT a solution of NaOH (877 mg, 21.9 mmol) in 10 mL MeOH is added dropwise. The reaction mixture is stirred for 16 h at RT and then evaporated down. The residue is combined with NaHCOs solution and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase is extracted again with NaHCOs solution and the aqueous phases are then acidified with 4 N HCl. The precipitate is filtered off, washed with water, dried and isophthalic acid monoester N-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.26 min; MS (M-H)"= 235) is further reacted directly. Isophthalic acid monoester N-2a (504 mg, 2.132 mmol) is taken up in 10 mL THF, combined with HATU (754 mg, 2.34 mmol) and DIPEA (814 μL, 4.87 mmol) and stirred for 20 min at RT. Then the aniline K-5a (570 mg, 2.123 mmol) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at 40 0C. The reaction mixture is filtered and the solvent is eliminated by distillation. The residue is taken up in EtOAc and extracted with sat. NaHCO3 solution. The organic phase is washed with sat. NaCl solution, dried on Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated down using the rotary evaporator. The crude product is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of Z-25a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.03 min; MS (M+H)+ = 487) are freeze-dried.
Methyl benzoate Z-25a (423 mg, 0.87 mmol) is taken up in THF (8 mL), and NaBH4 (190 g, 5.02 mmol) and then LiCl (154 mg, 3.63 mmol) are added batchwise. The reaction mixture is heated to 50 0C and stirred for 72 h. Then it is cooled to 0 0C and combined with stirring with 1 M NaOH solution. THF is eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the crude product is extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phases are washed with sat.
NaCl solution, dried on MgSO4, filtered, evaporated down using the rotary evaporator, the residue is taken up in DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of benzylalcohol N-3a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.81 min; MS (M+H)+ = 459) are freeze-dried.
b) Procedure for svnthesising XVa-I (benzyl chloride route, method A):
DCM
Figure imgf000179_0001
Figure imgf000179_0002
N-3a XVa-1 Benzylalcohol N-3a (40 mg, 0.09 mmol) is taken up in 3 ml DCM and combined with thionyl chloride (27 μL, 0.37 mmol) with stirring at RT. The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h at RT, evaporated down, the residue is taken up in DMF (300 μL), combined with z-propylamine (30 μL, 0.35 mmol) and stirred for 3 h at RT. The volatile constituents are eliminated using the rotary evaporator and the residue is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of XVa-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.19 min; MS (M+H)+ = 500) are freeze-dried.
Reaction scheme N-II
Figure imgf000180_0001
H2N,
R1 Z-3, CuSO4, Na-ascorbate
^
K-1 Z-3
Figure imgf000180_0002
XVa Example compounds of type XVa may also be synthesised by a slightly modified method according to reaction scheme N-II from the azides N-5 by cycloaddition with alkynes Z-3, CuSO4 and sodium ascorbate. The azides N-5 may be obtained from the corresponding benzylalcohols N-4 by diazotisation with for example NaNO2 in hydrochloric acid, subsequent reaction with sodium azide, activation of the benzylalcohol using thionyl chloride, for example, followed by reaction with an amine R9R10NH. The benzylalcohols N-4 are in turn synthesised by amide linking of the isophthalic acid monoester N-2 with nitroanilines K-I, subsequent reduction of the ester function, for example with NaBH4 in the presence OfCaCl2, and subsequent reduction of the nitro group, for example with hydrogen and Pd/C or with Fe in the presence OfNH4Cl. c) Procedure for synthesising N-4a
Figure imgf000181_0001
N-2b N-4a
The isophthalic acid monoester N-2b (3.76 g, 15.2 mmol) is dissolved in DMF (8 mL) and stirred for 10 min at RT with HATU (6.01 g, 16.6 mmol) and /Pr2EtNH (5.8 mL, 34.9 mmol). After the addition of aniline K-Ia (2.31 g, 15.2 mmol) the mixture is stirred overnight at 40 0C. The reaction mixture is purified by preparative RP-MPLC (gradient: water/acetonitrile = 80:20 to 2:98; 45 min). The product-containing fractions (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.35 min; MS (M+H)+ = 383) are combined and freeze-dried.
The amide intermediate product (3.9 g, 10.1 mmol) is placed in EtOH (70 mL), combined with CaCl2 (2.24 g, 20.3 mmol) and briefly stirred in the ultrasound bath. Then the mixture is cooled to 0 0C and NaBH4 (1.53 g, 40.5 mmol) in THF (70 mL) is added thereto. The mixture is left at this temperature for 1.5 h with stirring and then 1 N hydrochloric acid is carefully added. The aqueous phase is extracted with DCM (4 x 75 mL), the combined organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered off and evaporated down. The benzylalcohol thus obtained (2.86 g, 8.07 mmol) is placed in MeOH (50 mL), combined with Pd/C (10 %, 775 mg) and hydrogenated for 3 h at RT (p = 50 PSI). After the catalyst has been filtered off and the mixture has been evaporated down the benzylalcohol N-4a is obtained, which is used for the next reaction without any further purification steps. d) Procedure for svnthesising N-5a
NaN3
Figure imgf000182_0001
Figure imgf000182_0002
N-4a N-5a
The benzylalcohol N-4a (2.21 g, 6.82 mmol) placed at 0 0C in 2 N hydrochloric acid (29 mL) and dioxane (5 mL) is combined drop wise with a cooled solution of sodium nitrite (567 mg, 8.22 mmol) in water (2.2 mL). After the addition has ended the mixture is left for 30 min with stirring, then sodium azide (495 mg, 7.54 mmol) in cooled water (2.2 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred for a further 2.5 h. For working up the mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL). The combined organic phase is dried on MgSO4, filtered and evaporated down. The azide thus obtained is used for the next reaction without any further purification.
The azide (602 mg, 1.72 mmol) is placed in DCM (5 mL), combined with thionyl chloride (497 μL, 6.85 mmol) and stirred for 3 h at RT. The reaction mixture is evaporated down, the residue is taken up in DMF (3 mL), combined with pyrrolidine (710 μl, 8.59 mmol) and stirred overnight at 40 0C. The reaction mixture is purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of N-5a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.79 min; MS (M+H)+ = 404) are freeze-dried.
e) Procedure for svnthesising XVa-4
Figure imgf000182_0003
Z-3c
The azide N-5a (50.8 mg, 0.13 mmol), sodium ascorbate solution (40 mg; 0.20 mmol in 1 mL water) and CuSO4 solution (20.3 μl, 0.8 M) are added successively to the alkyne Z-3c, which is generated in situ from the trimethylsilyl-protected precursor (75.5 mg, 0.37 mmol) by reaction with K2CO3 (57.3 mg, 0.42 mmol) in MeOH (3 mL) at RT (30 min). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at 40 0C and then evaporated down. The residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product- containing fractions of XVa-4 (HPLC-MS: tRet = 2.32 min; MS (M+H)+ = 537) are freeze- dried.
Analogously to reaction methods a) and b) or c) to e) described above, Examples XVa-2 and XVa-3 and Examples XVa-5 - XVa-33 (Table 13) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000183_0001
Figure imgf000184_0001
Figure imgf000185_0001
Figure imgf000186_0001
Figure imgf000187_0001
Figure imgf000188_0002
Reaction scheme O
Figure imgf000188_0001
Example compounds of type XVIa are synthesised according to reaction scheme O by a reaction of cycloaddition from the corresponding azides O-2 with suitable alkynes Z-3 in the presence OfCuSO4 and sodium ascorbate using methods known from the literature. The azide compounds O-2 may be obtained by amide coupling from the anilines O- 1 and the benzoic acids A-I using methods known from the literature.
Example compounds of type XVIb, which have an inverse amide bond, compared with the compounds XVIa, may be synthesised from the corresponding benzoic acids O-3 with the anilines K-5 described hereinbefore. The benzoic acids O-3 are synthesised using methods known from the literature. a) Procedure for svnthesising O-2a
Figure imgf000189_0001
O-1 O-2a
The benzoic acid A-Ia (500 mg, 2.82 mmol) is placed in DMF (15 mL), combined with HATU (1.19 g, 3.11 mmol) and /Pr2EtN (1.5 mL), stirred for 30 min at RT and then combined with the aniline O- Ia (450 mg, 2.84 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT and then evaporated down completely. The residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by RP-MPLC. The product-containing fractions of O-2a (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.29 min; MS (M+H)+ = 320) are freeze-dried.
b) Procedure for svnthesising XVIa-I
Figure imgf000189_0002
Figure imgf000189_0003
Z-3a, CuSO4, Na-ascorbate
Figure imgf000189_0004
O-2a XVIa-1 l,5-dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carbaldehyde Z-2a (120 mg, 0.97 mmol) and the Bestmann- Ohira reagent (S. Mϋller et al. Synlett 1996, 521-522) (B-O, 360 mg, 1.87 mmol) are placed in MeOH (5 mL) and combined with potassium carbonate (260 mg, 1.88 mmol). After 3 d stirring at RT the azide O-2a (100 mg, 0.31 mmol) is added. Then sodium ascorbate sin. (1 M; 0.32 mL), CuSO4 sin. (0.1 M; 0.44 mL) and NEt3 (0.1 mL, 0.72 mmol) are added and the mixture is stirred for 3 d at RT. For working up the mixture is evaporated down, diluted with water, extracted 3x with EtOAc and the combined organic phases are evaporated down again. The residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative ΗPLC. The product-containing fractions of XVIa-I (ΗPLC-MS: tRet. = 2.02 min; MS (M+H)+ = 440) are freeze-dried.
c) Procedure for synthesising XVIb-I
Figure imgf000190_0001
O-3a
XVIb
The benzoic acid O-3a (50 mg, 0.26 mmol) is placed in DMF (3.5 mL), combined with HATU (110 mg, 0.29 mmol) and /Pr2EtN (51 μl, 0.29 mmol), stirred for 30 min at RT and then the aniline K-5a (78 mg; 0.29 mmol) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at RT and then evaporated down completely. The residue is taken up in a little DMF and purified by preparative HPLC. The product-containing fractions of XVIb-I (HPLC-MS: tRet. = 1.95 min; MS (M+H)+ = 440) are freeze-dried.
Analogously to reaction methods a) to c) described above, Examples XVIa-2 to XVIa- 18 and Examples XVIb-2 to XVIb-7 (Table 14) or comparable further examples may be obtained from the corresponding precursors, which are either commercially obtainable or are prepared using methods known from the literature.
Figure imgf000191_0001
Figure imgf000192_0001
Figure imgf000193_0001
Figure imgf000194_0001
As novel compounds with an inverse amide bond (compared with the amide bonds of example types I to XI) only example types XII to XVI (aryl- and benzylamines, cyanoalkyls, cyanocycloalkyls) are represented by specific example compounds. In principle, however, it is also possible to synthesise all the other compound types I to XI with an inverse amide bond by modification of the methods of synthesis described herein and by using the corresponding educts.
In order to synthesise compounds according to the invention wherein the group L is different from -C(O)NH- and -NHC(O)-, in a departure from the benzoic acids A-2, the anilines K-5 or the respective benzoic acids and anilines used as coupling partners, components with other functional groups may also be synthesised and used in the reactions (benzoic acids, arylalcohols -> esters; sulphonic acids, anilines -> sulphonamides, etc.).
The following Examples describe the biological activity of the compounds according to the invention without restricting the invention to these Examples.
Compounds of general formula (1) are characterised by their wide range of applications in the therapeutic field. Particular mention should be made of those applications in which the inhibition of specific signal enzymes, particularly the inhibiting effect on the proliferation of cultivated human tumour cells but also the proliferation of other cells, such as endothelial cells, for example, plays a part.
Kinase test B-Raf (V600E)
In a dilution series, 10 μL aliquots of test substance solution are placed in a multiwell plate. The dilution series is selected so as to cover a range of concentrations from 2 μM to 0.128 or 0.017 nM. If necessary the initial concentration is changed from 2 μM to 10 or 0.4 μM and further dilution is carried out accordingly. The final concentration of DMSO is 5 %. 10 μL of the B-Raf (V600E) kinase solution are pipetted in (containing 2.5 ng B-Raf (V600E)-kinase in 20 mM TrisHCl pH 7.5, 0.1 mM EDTA, 0.1 mM EGTA, 0.286 mM sodium orthovanadate, 10 % glycerol, 1 mg/mL bovine serum albumin, 1 mM dithiothreitol) and incubated for 1 h at RT with agitation. The kinase reaction is started by the addition of 20 μL ATP solution [final concentration: 250 μM ATP, 30 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.02 % Brij, 0.2 mM sodium-orthovanadate, 10 mM magnesium acetate, phosphatase cocktail (Sigma, # P2850, dilution recommended by the manufacturer), 0.1 mM EGTA] and 10 μL MEKl solution [containing 50 ng biotinylated MEKl
(prepared from purified MEKl according to standard procedure, e.g. with reagent EZ-Link Sulfo-NHS-LC-Biotin, Pierce, #21335) in 50 mM Hepes pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl, 10 % glycerol, 0.02 % Brij-35, 0.2 mM PMSF, 0.2 mM benzamidine] and carried out for 60 min at RT with constant agitation. The reaction is stopped by the addition of 12 μL of a 100 mM EDTA solution and incubated for a further 5 min. 55 μL of the reaction solution are transferred into a streptavidine-coated plate (e.g. Streptawell HighBond, Roche, # 11989685001) and shaken gently for 1 h at RT, in order to bind biotinylated MEKl to the plate. After removal of the liquid the plate is washed five times with 200 μL of IxPBS, and 100 μL solution of primary antibody plus europium-labelled secondary antibody [Anti Phospho-MEK (Ser217/221), Cell Signaling # 9121 and Eu-Nl labeled goat-anti-rabbit antibody, Perkin Elmer # AD01015], the primary antibody is diluted 1 :2000 and the secondary antibody is added to 0.4-0.5 μg/mL diluted in Delfϊa Assay Buffer (Perkin Elmer, # 1244-111). After 1 h agitation at RT the solution is poured away and washed five times with 200 μL Delfϊa Wash Buffer (Perkin Elmer # 4010-00101244-114). After the addition of 200 μL Enhancement Solution (Perkin Elmer # 4001-00101244- 105) the preparation is shaken for 10 min at RT and then measured in a Wallac Victor using the programme "Delfϊa Time Resolved Fluorescence (Europium)". IC50 values are determined from these dosage-activity curves using the software programme (GraphPadPrizm). Most example compounds of type I to XVI exhibit a good to very good inhibitory effect in this B-Raf (V600E) inhibition test, i.e. they have an IC50 value of less than 0.3 μM, generally less than 100 nM. Measurement of the inhibition of proliferation on cultivated human melanoma cells (SK-MEL28)
To measure proliferation on cultivated human tumour cells, cells of melanoma cell line SK-MEL28 [American Type Culture Collection (ATCC)] are cultivated in MEM medium, supplemented with 10 % foetal calf serum, 2 % sodium bicarbonate, 1 mM sodium pyruvate, 1 % non-essential amino acids (e.g. from Cambrex, # BEl 3-114E) and 2 mM glutamine. SK-MEL28 cells are placed in 96-well flat-bottomed plates at a density of 2500 cells per well in supplemented MEM medium (see above) and incubated overnight in an incubator (at 37 0C and 5 % CO2). The active substances are added to the cells in various concentrations so as to cover a range of concentrations from 50 μM to 3.2 nM. If necessary the initial concentration is changed from 50 μM to 10 μM or 2 μM and further dilution (to 0.6 nM or 0.12 nM) is carried out accordingly. After a further 72 hours incubation, 20 μl AlamarBlue reagent (Serotec Ltd., # BUF012B) is added to each well, and the cells are incubated for a further 3-6 hours. The colour change of the AlamarBlue reagent is determined in a fluorescence spectrophotometer (e.g. Gemini, Molecular Devices). EC50 values are calculated using the software programme (GraphPadPrizm).
Most of the example compounds of type I to XVI exhibit a good to very good activity in the cellular SK-MEL28 assay, i.e. they have an EC50 value of less than 5 μM, generally less than 2 μM.
Measurement of the inhibition of proliferation on cultivated human melanoma cells (A375)
To measure proliferation on cultivated human tumour cells, cells of melanoma cell line A375 [American Type Culture Collection (ATCC)] are cultivated in MEM medium, supplemented with 10 % foetal calf serum and 2 % sodium bicarbonate. Test substances are tested on A375 cells according to the method described for SK-MEL28 cells (see above).
Most of the example compounds of type I to XVI exhibit a good to very good activity in the cellular A375 assay, i.e. they have an EC50 value of less than 3 μM, generally less than 1 μM.
The substances of the present invention are B-Raf kinase inhibitors. As can be demonstrated by DNA staining followed by FACS or Cellomics Array Scan analysis, the inhibition of proliferation achieved by the compounds according to the invention is brought about primarily by preventing entry into the DNA synthesis phase. The treated cells arrest in the Gl phase of the cell cycle. Accordingly, the compounds according to the invention are also tested on other tumour cells. For example these compounds are active on the colon carcinoma cell line Cok>205 and the breast cancer cell line DU4475 and can be used for these indications. This demonstrates the usefulness of the compounds according to the invention for treating various types of tumours.
Because of their biological properties the compounds of general formula (1) according to the invention, the tautomers, racemates, enantiomers, diastereomers, mixtures, polymorphs and the salts of all the above-mentioned forms are suitable for the treatment of diseases characterised by excessive or abnormal cell proliferation.
Such diseases include for example: viral infections (e.g. HIV and Kaposi's sarcoma); inflammatory and autoimmune diseases (e.g. colitis, arthritis, Alzheimer's disease, glomerulonephritis and wound healing); bacterial, fungal and/or parasitic infections; leukaemias, lymphomas and solid tumours (e.g. carcinomas and sarcomas), skin diseases (e.g. psoriasis); diseases based on hyperplasia which are characterised by an increase in the number of cells (e.g. fibroblasts, hepatocytes, bones and bone marrow cells, cartilage or smooth muscle cells or epithelial cells (e.g. endometrial hyperplasia)); bone diseases and cardiovascular diseases (e.g. restenosis and hypertrophy). They are also useful for protecting proliferating cells (e.g. hair, intestinal, blood and progenitor cells) from DNA damage caused by radiation, UV treatment and/or cytostatic treatment.
For example, the following cancers may be treated with compounds according to the invention, without being restricted thereto: brain tumours such as for example acoustic neurinoma, astrocytomas such as pilocytic astrocytomas, fibrillary astrocytoma, protoplasmic astrocytoma, gemistocytary astrocytoma, anaplastic astrocytoma and glioblastoma, brain lymphomas, brain metastases, hypophyseal tumour such as prolactinoma, HGH (human growth hormone) producing tumour and ACTH producing tumour (adrenocorticotropic hormone), craniopharyngiomas, medulloblastomas, meningeomas and oligodendrogliomas; nerve tumours (neoplasms) such as for example tumours of the vegetative nervous system such as neuroblastoma sympathicum, ganglioneuroma, paraganglioma (pheochromocytoma, chromaffmoma) and glomus- caroticum tumour, tumours on the peripheral nervous system such as amputation neuroma, neurofibroma, neurinoma (neurilemmoma, Schwannoma) and malignant Schwannoma, as well as tumours of the central nervous system such as brain and bone marrow tumours; intestinal cancer such as for example carcinoma of the rectum, colon, anus, small intestine and duodenum; eyelid tumours such as basalioma or basal cell carcinoma; pancreatic cancer or carcinoma of the pancreas; bladder cancer or carcinoma of the bladder; lung cancer (bronchial carcinoma) such as for example small-cell bronchial carcinomas (oat cell carcinomas) and non- small cell bronchial carcinomas such as plate epithelial carcinomas, adenocarcinomas and large-cell bronchial carcinomas; breast cancer such as for example mammary carcinoma such as infiltrating ductal carcinoma, colloid carcinoma, lobular invasive carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, adenocystic carcinoma and papillary carcinoma; non-Hodgkin's lymphomas (NHL) such as for example Burkitt's lymphoma, low- malignancy non-Hodgkin's lymphomas (NHL) and mucosis fungoides; uterine cancer or endometrial carcinoma or corpus carcinoma; CUP syndrome (Cancer of Unknown Primary); ovarian cancer or ovarian carcinoma such as mucinous, endometrial or serous cancer; gall bladder cancer; bile duct cancer such as for example Klatskin tumour; testicular cancer such as for example seminomas and non-seminomas; lymphoma (lymphosarcoma) such as for example malignant lymphoma, Hodgkin's disease, non- Hodgkin's lymphomas (NHL) such as chronic lymphatic leukaemia, leukaemic reticuloendotheliosis, immunocytoma, plasmocytoma (multiple myeloma), immuno- blastoma, Burkitt's lymphoma, T-zone mycosis fungoides, large-cell anaplastic lymphoblastoma and lymphoblastoma; laryngeal cancer such as for example tumours of the vocal cords, supra-glottal, glottal and subglottal laryngeal tumours; bone cancer such as for example osteochondroma, chondroma, chondroblastoma, chondromyxoid fibroma, osteoma, osteoid osteoma, osteoblastoma, eosinophilic granuloma, giant cell tumour, chondrosarcoma, osteosarcoma, Ewing's sarcoma, reticulo-sarcoma, plasmocytoma, fibrous dysplasia, juvenile bone cysts and aneurysmatic bone cysts; head and neck tumours such as for example tumours of the lips, tongue, floor of the mouth, oral cavity, gums, palate, salivary glands, throat, nasal cavity, paranasal sinuses, larynx and middle ear; liver cancer such as for example liver cell carcinoma or hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC); leukaemias, such as for example acute leukaemias such as acute lymphatic/lymphoblastic leukaemia (ALL), acute myeloid leukaemia (AML); chronic leukaemias such as chronic lymphatic leukaemia (CLL), chronic myeloid leukaemia (CML); stomach cancer or gastric carcinoma such as for example papillary, tubular and mucinous adenocarcinoma, signet ring cell carcinoma, adenosquamous carcinoma, small-cell carcinoma and undifferentiated carcinoma; melanomas such as for example superficially spreading, nodular, lentigo- maligna and acral-lentiginous melanoma; renal cancer such as for example kidney cell carcinoma or hypernephroma or Grawitz's tumour; oesophageal cancer or carcinoma of the oesophagus; penile cancer; prostate cancer; throat cancer or carcinomas of the pharynx such as for example nasopharynx carcinomas, oropharynx carcinomas and hypopharynx carcinomas; retinoblastoma; vaginal cancer or vaginal carcinoma; plate epithelial carcinomas, adenocarcinomas, in situ carcinomas, malignant melanomas and sarcomas; thyroid carcinomas such as for example papillary, follicular and medullary thyroid carcinoma, as well as anaplastic carcinomas; spinalioma, epidormoid carcinoma and plate epithelial carcinoma of the skin; thymomas, cancer of the urethra and cancer of the vulva.
The new compounds may be used for the prevention, short-term or long-term treatment of the above-mentioned diseases, optionally also in combination with radiotherapy or other "state-of-the-art" compounds, such as e.g. cytostatic or cytotoxic substances, cell proliferation inhibitors, anti-angiogenic substances, steroids or antibodies.
The compounds of general formula (1) may be used on their own or in combination with other active substances according to the invention, optionally also in combination with other pharmacologically active substances.
Chemo therapeutic agents which may be administered in combination with the compounds according to the invention include, without being restricted thereto, hormones, hormone analogues and antihormones (e.g. tamoxifen, toremifene, raloxifene, fulvestrant, megestrol acetate, flutamide, nilutamide, bicalutamide, aminoglutethimide, cyproterone acetate, finasteride, buserelin acetate, fludrocortisone, fluoxymesterone, medroxyprogesterone, octreotide), aromatase inhibitors (e.g. anastrozole, letrozole, liarozole, vorozole, exemestane, atamestane), LHRH agonists and antagonists (e.g. goserelin acetate, luprolide), inhibitors of growth factors (growth factors such as for example "platelet derived growth factor" and "hepatocyte growth factor", inhibitors are for example "growth factor" antibodies, "growth factor receptor" antibodies and tyrosinekinase inhibitors, such as for example gefϊtinib, imatinib, lapatinib and trastuzumab); antimetabolites (e.g. antifolates such as methotrexate, raltitrexed, pyrimidine analogues such as 5-fluorouracil, capecitabin and gemcitabin, purine and adenosine analogues such as mercaptopurine, thioguanine, cladribine and pentostatin, cytarabine, fludarabine); antitumour antibiotics (e.g. anthracyclins such as doxorubicin, daunorubicin, epirubicin and idarubicin, mitomycin-C, bleomycin, dactinomycin, plicamycin, streptozocin); platinum derivatives (e.g. cisplatin, oxaliplatin, carbop latin); alkylation agents (e.g. estramustin, meclorethamine, melphalan, chlorambucil, busulphan, dacarbazin, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, temozolomide, nitrosoureas such as for example carmustin and lomustin, thiotepa); antimitotic agents (e.g. Vinca alkaloids such as for example vinblastine, vindesin, vinorelbin and vincristine; and taxanes such as paclitaxel, docetaxel); topoisomerase inhibitors (e.g. epipodophyllotoxins such as for example etoposide and etopophos, teniposide, amsacrin, topotecan, irinotecan, mitoxantron) and various chemotherapeutic agents such as amifostin, anagrelid, clodronat, filgrastin, interferon alpha, leucovorin, rituximab, procarbazine, levamisole, mesna, mitotane, pamidronate and porfϊmer. Suitable preparations include for example tablets, capsules, suppositories, solutions - particularly solutions for injection (s.c, i.v., i.m.) and infusion -, elixirs, emulsions or dispersible powders. The content of the pharmaceutically active compound(s) should be in the range from 0.1 to 90 wt.-%, preferably 0.5 to 50 wt.-% of the composition as a whole, i.e. in amounts which are sufficient to achieve the dosage range specified below. The doses specified may, if necessary, be given several times a day.
Suitable tablets may be obtained, for example, by mixing the active substance(s) with known excipients, for example inert diluents such as calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or lactose, disintegrants such as corn starch or alginic acid, binders such as starch or gelatine, lubricants such as magnesium stearate or talc and/or agents for delaying release, such as carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, or polyvinyl acetate. The tablets may also comprise several layers.
Coated tablets may be prepared accordingly by coating cores produced analogously to the tablets with substances normally used for tablet coatings, for example collidone or shellac, gum arabic, talc, titanium dioxide or sugar. To achieve delayed release or prevent incompatibilities the core may also consist of a number of layers. Similarly the tablet coating may consist of a number of layers to achieve delayed release, possibly using the excipients mentioned above for the tablets.
Syrups or elixirs containing the active substances or combinations thereof according to the invention may additionally contain a sweetener such as saccharine, cyclamate, glycerol or sugar and a flavour enhancer, e.g. a flavouring such as vanillin or orange extract. They may also contain suspension adjuvants or thickeners such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, wetting agents such as, for example, condensation products of fatty alcohols with ethylene oxide, or preservatives such as p-hydroxybenzoates.
Solutions for injection and infusion are prepared in the usual way, e.g. with the addition of isotonic agents, preservatives such as p-hydroxybenzoates, or stabilisers such as alkali metal salts of ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, optionally using emulsifϊers and/or dispersants, whilst if water is used as the diluent, for example, organic solvents may optionally be used as solvating agents or dissolving aids, and transferred into injection vials or ampoules or infusion bottles. Capsules containing one or more active substances or combinations of active substances may for example be prepared by mixing the active substances with inert carriers such as lactose or sorbitol and packing them into gelatine capsules.
Suitable suppositories may be made for example by mixing with carriers provided for this purpose, such as neutral fats or polyethyleneglycol or the derivatives thereof. Excipients which may be used include, for example, water, pharmaceutically acceptable organic solvents such as paraffins (e.g. petroleum fractions), vegetable oils (e.g. groundnut or sesame oil), mono- or polyfunctional alcohols (e.g. ethanol or glycerol), carriers such as e.g. natural mineral powders (e.g. kaolins, clays, talc, chalk), synthetic mineral powders (e.g. highly dispersed silicic acid and silicates), sugars (e.g. cane sugar, lactose and glucose) emulsifiers (e.g. lignin, spent sulphite liquors, methylcellulose, starch and polyvinylpyrrolidone) and lubricants (e.g. magnesium stearate, talc, stearic acid and sodium lauryl sulphate).
The preparations are administered by the usual methods, preferably by oral or transdermal route, most preferably by oral route. For oral administration the tablets may, of course contain, apart from the abovementioned carriers, additives such as sodium citrate, calcium carbonate and dicalcium phosphate together with various additives such as starch, preferably potato starch, gelatine and the like. Moreover, lubricants such as magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulphate and talc may be used at the same time for the tabletting process. In the case of aqueous suspensions the active substances may be combined with various flavour enhancers or colourings in addition to the excipients mentioned above.
For parenteral use, solutions of the active substances with suitable liquid carriers may be used.
The dosage for intravenous use is from 1 - 1000 mg per hour, preferably between 5 and 500 mg per hour.
However, it may sometimes be necessary to depart from the amounts specified, depending on the body weight, the route of administration, the individual response to the drug, the nature of its formulation and the time or interval over which the drug is administered.
Thus, in some cases it may be sufficient to use less than the minimum dose given above, whereas in other cases the upper limit may have to be exceeded. When administering large amounts it may be advisable to divide them up into a number of smaller doses spread over the day.
The formulation examples that follow illustrate the present invention without restricting its scope: Examples of pharmaceutical formulations
A) Tablets per tablet
active substance according to formula (1) 100 mg lactose 140 mg corn starch 240 mg polyvinylpyrrolidone 15 mg magnesium stearate 5 mg ^^===
500 mg
The finely ground active substance, lactose and some of the corn starch are mixed together. The mixture is screened, then moistened with a solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone in water, kneaded, wet-granulated and dried. The granules, the remaining corn starch and the magnesium stearate are screened and mixed together. The mixture is compressed to produce tablets of suitable shape and size.
B) Tablets per tablet
active substance according to formula (1) 80 mg lactose 55 mg corn starch 190 mg microcrystalline cellulose 35 mg polyvinylpyrrolidone 15 mg sodium-carboxymethyl starch 23 mg magnesium stearate 2 mg
400 mg The finely ground active substance, some of the corn starch, lactose, microcrystalline cellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone are mixed together, the mixture is screened and worked with the remaining corn starch and water to form a granulate which is dried and screened. The sodiumcarboxymethyl starch and the magnesium stearate are added and mixed in and the mixture is compressed to form tablets of a suitable size.
C) Ampoule solution
active substance according to formula (1) 50 mg sodium chloride 50 mg water for inj . 5 mL
The active substance is dissolved in water at its own pH or optionally at pH 5.5 to 6.5 and sodium chloride is added to make it isotonic. The solution obtained is filtered free from pyrogens and the filtrate is transferred under aseptic conditions into ampoules which are then sterilised and sealed by fusion. The ampoules contain 5 mg, 25 mg and 50 mg of active substance.

Claims

Patent Claims
1. Compounds of general formula (1)
Figure imgf000205_0001
(D
, wherein
R1 denotes a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s), each independently selected from among Ra and Rb;
R2 has the partial structure (i) or (ii)
Figure imgf000205_0002
R3 is selected from among hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO2, -NRhRh, -ORh, -C(O)Rh, -C(O)NRhRh, -SRh, -S(O)R\ -S(O)2Rh, CMalkyl, CMhaloalkyl, C3-7cycloalkyl and 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl;
R5 is selected from among d^alkyl, -OCi-βalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, -OCi-βhaloalkyl, C3-7cycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, all the above-mentioned groups optionally being substituted by Ci_6alkyl, -CN or -OH; a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R6 or R7 has one of the partial structures (iii) to (vi)
Figure imgf000206_0001
(iϋ) (iv) (V) (vi) and in case a) the other two groups, each independently of one another, and in case b) the second group is/are selected from among hydrogen, C^alkyl, -OCi_6alkyl, -OH, -CN, -NHCi_6alkyl, -N(Ci.6alkyl)2 and halogen or c) where partial structure (i) is present R5 denotes a Ci_6alkyl or C3-4 eye loalkyl substituted by a substituent -CN and R6, R7 and R8 each denote hydrogen;
R9 is selected from among hydrogen and Ci_6alkyl, R10 is selected from among Ra and -ORa, or the group -NR9R10 in all denotes a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb;
R11, R12 and R13 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R11 corresponds to a group Ra and the group -NR12R13 together denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, or R11 and R12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R13 corresponds to a group Ra;
R14, R15 and R16 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R14 corresponds to a group Ra and the group -NR15R16 together denotes a nitrogen- containing, 3-14-membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, or
R14 and R15 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R16 corresponds to a group Ra;
R17, R18 and R19 each independently of one another correspond to a group Ra, or
R17 and R18 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R19 corresponds to a group Ra, or R17 and R19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R18 corresponds to a group Ra, or
R18 and R19 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a nitrogen-containing, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra and Rb, and R17 corresponds to a group Ra;
L is selected from among -C(O)NH-, -NHC(O)-, -C(S)NH-, -NHC(S)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -NH-, -S(O)- -S(O)O-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2O-, -S(O)NH-, -S(O)2NH-, -OS(O)- -OS(O)2-, -OS(O)NH-, -OS(O)2NH-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)S-, -C(NH)NH-, -OC(O)-, -OC(O)O-, -OC(O)NH-, -SC(O)- -SC(O)O-, -SC(O)NH-, -NHC(NH)- -NHS(O)-, -NHS(O)O-, -NHS(O)2-, -NHS(O)2O-, -NHS(O)2NH-, -NHC(O)O-, -NHC(O)NH- and -NHC(S)NH- or denotes a bond; Y is selected from among -O- and -S- or denotes a bond; x and y each independently of one another have the value 0, 1, 2 or 3; each Ra independently of one another in each case denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rb and/or Rc, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C^iβCycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rb denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORC, -SRC, -NRCRC, -ONRCRC, -N(ORC)RC, -NRgNRcRc, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3, -C(O)RC, -C(O)ORC, -C(O)NRCRC, -C(O)SRC,
-C(0)NRgNRcRc, -C(O)NRgORc, -[C(O)]2NRCRC, -[C(O)NRg]2Rc, -C(S)RC, -C(S)ORC, -C(S)NRCRC, -C(S)SRC, -C(NRg)Rc, -N=CRCRC, -C(NRg)ORc, -C(NRg)NRcRc, -C(NRg)SRc, -C(NRg)NRgNRcRc, -C(N0Rg)Rc, -C(NORg)NRcRc, -C(NNRgRg)Rc, -C[NNRgC(O)NRgRg]Rc, -OS(O)RC, -OS(O)ORC, -OS(O)NRCRC, -OS(O)2R0, -OS(O)2OR0, -OS(O)2NRCRC, -OC(O)RC, -OC(O)ORC, -OC(O)SRC, -0C(0)NRcRc, -0[C(0)]2NRcRc, -0[C(0)NRg]2NRcRc, -OC(S)RC, -0C(NRg)Rc, -0C(NRg)NRcRc, -0NRgC(0)Rc, -S(O)RC, -S(O)ORC, -S(O)NRCRC, -S(O)2RC, -S(O)2OR0, -S(O)2NRCRC, -[S(O)2]2NRCRC, -SC(O)RC, -SC(O)ORC, -SC(O)NRCRC, -SC(S)RC, -SC(NRg)Rc, -SC(NRg)NRcRc, -NRgC(0)Rc, -NRgC(0)0Rc, -NRgC(O)NRcRc, -NRgC(O)SRc, -NRgC(O)NRgNRcRc, -NRgC(S)Rc, -NRgC(S)NRcRc, -NRgC(NRg)Rc, -N=CRCNRCRC, -NRgC(NRg)0Rc, -NRgC(NRg)NRcRc, -NRgC(NRg)SRc, -NRgC(N0Rg)Rc, -NRgS(O)Rc, -NRgS(O)ORc, -NRgS(O)2Rc, -NRgS(O)2ORc, -NRgS(0)2NRcRc, -NRgNRgC(0)Rc, -NRgNRgC(O)NRcRc, -NRgNRgC(NRg)Rc, -NRg[C(0)]2Rc, -NRg[C(0)]20Rc, -NRg[C(0)]2NRcRc, -[NRgC(0)]2Rc, -[NR§C(0)]20Rc, -NRS[S(O)2]2RC, -N(0Rs)C(0)Rc, -N[C(O)RC]NRCRC, -N[C(O)RC]2, -N[S(O)2RC]2, -N{[C(O)]2RC}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORC}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NRCRC}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRg, =N0Rg, =NNRgRg and =NNRgC(0)NRgRg, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Rc independently of one another in each case denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rd and/or Re, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered hetero-aryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rd is a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORe, -SRe, -NReRe, -ONReRe, -N(ORe)Re, -N(Rg)NReRe, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3,-C(O)Re, -C(O)ORe, -C(0)NReRe, -C(O)SRe, -C(0)NRgNReRe, -C(O)NRsORe, -[C(O)]2NReRe, -[C(O)NRg]2Re, -C(S)Re, -C(S)ORe, -C(S)NReRe, -C(S)SRe, -C(NRg)Re, -N=CReRe, -C(NRg)ORe, -C(NRg)NReRe, -C(NRg)SRe, -C(NRg)NRgNReRe, -C(NORg)Re, -C(N0Rg)NReRe, -C(NNRgRg)Re, -C[NNRgC(O)NRgRg]Re, -OS(O)Re, -OS(O)ORe, -OS(O)NReRe, -OS(O)2R6,
-OS(O)2OR6, -OS(O)2NReRe, -OC(O)Re, -OC(O)ORe, -OC(O)SRe, -0C(0)NReRe, -0[C(0)]2NReRe, -0[C(0)NRg]2NReRe, -OC(S)Re, -OC(NRg)Re, -0C(NRg)NReRe, -0NRgC(0)Re, -S(O)Re, -S(O)ORe, -S(O)NReRe, -S(O)2R6, -S(O)2ORe, -S(O)2NReRe, -[S(O)2]2NReRe, -SC(O)Re, -SC(O)ORe, -SC(O)NReRe, -SC(S)Re, -SC(NRg)Re, -SC(NRg)NReRe, -NRgC(0)Re, -NRgC(0)0Re, -NRgC(O)NReRe, -NRgC(O)SRe,
-NRgC(O)NRgNReRe, -NRgC(S)Re, -NRgC(S)NReRe, -NRgC(NRg)Re, -N=CR6NR6R6, -NRgC(NRg)0Re, -NRgC(NRg)NReRe, -NRgC(NRg)SRe, -NRgC(N0Rg)Re, -NRgS(O)Re, -NRgS(O)ORe, -NRgS(0)2Re, -NRgS(O)2ORe, -NRgS(0)2NReRe, -NRgNRgC(0)Re, -NRgNRgC(O)NReRe, -NRgNRgC(NRg)Re, -NRg[C(0)]2Re, -NRg[C(0)]20Re, -NRg[C(0)]2NReRe, -[NRgC(0)]2Re, -[NRgC(0)]20Re, -NRs[S(O)2]2Re, -N(0Rs)C(0)Re, -N[C(0)Re]NReRe, -N[C(0)Re]2, -N[S(O)2Re]2, -N{[C(O)]2Re}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORe}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NReRe}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRg, =N0Rg, =NNRgRg and =NNRgC(0)NRgRg, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Re independently of one another in each case denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rf and/or Rg, selected from among Ci-βalkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rf is a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -OR8, -SRg, -NRgRg, -ONRgRg, -N(ORg)Rg, -N(Rh)NRgRg, halogen, -CN, -NC, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO2, -N3,-C(O)Rg, -C(O)ORg, -C(O)NRgRg ,-C(O)SRg, -C(O)NRhNRgRg, -C(O)NRhORg, -[C(O)]2NRgRg, -[C(O)NRh]2Rg, -C(S)Rg, -C(S)OR8, -C(S)NRgRg, -C(S)SR8, -C(NRh)R8, -N=CR8R8, -C(NRh)OR8, -C(NRh)NR8R8, -C(NRh)SR8, -C(NRh)NRhNR8R8, -C(NORh)R8, -C(NORh)NR8R8, -C(NNRhRh)R8,
-C[NNRhC(O)NRhRh]R8, -OS(O)R8, -OS(O)OR8, -OS(O)NR8R8, -OS(O)2R8, -OS(O)2OR8, -OS(O)2NR8R8, -OC(O)R8, -OC(O)OR8, -OC(O)SR8, -OC(O)NR8R8, -O[C(O)]2NR8R8, -O[C(O)NRh]2NR8R8, -OC(S)R8, -OC(NRh)R8, -0C(NRh)NR8Rg, -ONRhC(O)R8, -S(O)R8, -S(O)OR8, -S(O)NR8R8, -S(O)2R8, -S(O)2OR8, -S(O)2NR8R8, -[S(O)2]2NR8R8, -SC(O)R8, -SC(O)OR8, -SC(O)NR8R8, -SC(S)R8, -SC(NRh)R8, -SC(NRh)NRgRg, -NRhC(0)Rg, -NRhC(O)ORg, -NRhC(O)NR8R8, -NRhC(O)SR8, -NRhC(O)NRhNR8R8, -NRhC(S)R8, -NR11C(S)NR8R8, -NRhC(NRh)R8, -N=CR8NRgRg, -NRhC(NRh)0Rg, -NRhC(NRh)NRgRg, -NRhC(NRh)SRg, -NRhC(N0Rh)Rg, -NRhS(O)Rg, -NRhS(O)ORg, -NRhS(O)2Rg, -NRhS(O)2ORg, -NRhS(O)2NRgRg, -NRhNRhC(0)R8, -NRhNRhC(O)NRgRg, -NRhNRhC(NRh)Rg, -NRh[C(O)]2Rg, -NRh[C(O)]2ORg,
-NRh[C(0)]2NRgRg, -[NRhC(O)]2Rg ,-[NRhC(O)]2ORg, -NRh[S(O)2]2Rg, -N(ORh)C(O)Rg, -N[C(0)Rg]NRgRg, -N[C(O)Rg]2, -N[S(O)2Rg]2, -N{[C(O)]2Rg}2, -N{[C(O)]2ORg}2 and -N{[C(O)]2NRgRg}2 as well as the bivalent substituents =0, =S, =NRh, =N0Rh, =NNRhRh and =NNRhC(0)NRhRh, while these bivalent substituents may only be substituents in non- aromatic ring systems; each Rg in each case independently of one another denote hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rh, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered hetero-aryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rh is selected independently of one another in each case from among hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci_6haloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4_i6Cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; while the compounds (1) may optionally also be present in the form of the tautomers, the racemates, the enantiomers, the diastereomers, the mixtures thereof, the polymorphs thereof or as pharmacologically acceptable salts of all the above-mentioned forms; with the proviso that the compound
Λ/-(5-tert-butyl-3-{[(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-methyl-amino]-methyl}-2-methoxy-phenyl)- 4-methyl-3-(4-pyridin-3-yl-[ 1.2.3]triazol- 1 -yl)-benzamide is excluded.
2. Compounds according to claim 1 , wherein
R1 denotes a heteroaryl selected from among pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,
Figure imgf000211_0001
3. Compounds according to one of claims 1 or 2, wherein
R1 is mono- or polysubstituted by identical or different groups and the group(s) is/are each independently selected from among Ci_6alkyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl, Ci-βhaloalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C^iβcycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, C7_i6arylalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl, 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl, -OH, -OCi_6alkyl, -NH2, -NHCi_6alkyl, -NHCs-iocycloalkyl, -N(Ci_6alkyl)2, -NHC(O)Ci_6alkyl, -NHC(O)OCi_6alkyl, -NHC(O)NHC i-6alkyl, halogen, -C(O)Ci_6alkyl, -C(O)C3-I ocycloalkyl, -SC^alkyl, -C(O)OC i_6alkyl, -C(O)NHC i_6alkyl, -CN and -NHC(O)C3_7Cycloalkyl, all the above-mentioned groups optionally themselves being substituted by a substituent selected from among -OH, -0Ci_6alkyl,
-OCs-iocycloalkyl, -NH2, -NHCi_6alkyl, -NHCi_6haloalkyl, -NHCs-iocycloalkyl, -N(Ci_6alkyl)2, halogen, -C(O)OC l-βalkyl, Ci_6alkyl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl.
4. Compounds according to one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
R3 is selected from among methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, ώo-propyl, 1 -propyl, 1 -butyl, 2-butyl, tert-butyl, fluorine, chlorine and bromine.
5. Compounds according to one of claims 1 to 4, wherein L is selected from among -C(O)NH- and -NHC(O)-.
6. Compounds according to one of claims 1 to 5, wherein R5 is selected from among
Figure imgf000212_0001
7. Compounds according to one of claims 1 to 6, wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 and b) where partial structure (ii) is present one of the groups R6 or R7 has one of the partial structures (iii-a) to (iii-h)
Figure imgf000213_0001
(iii-a) (iii-b) (iii-c) (iii-d)
Figure imgf000213_0002
(iii-e) (iii-f) (iii-g) (iii-h) and R9 and R10 are defined as in claim 1.
8. Compounds according to claim 7, wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b) or (iii-c), or one of the groups R6 or R7 has the partial structure (iii-d), or
R7 has the partial structure (iii-e), (iii-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h); and b) where partial structure (ii) is present R7 has the partial structure (iii-a).
9. Compounds according to claim 8, wherein L denotes -NHC(O)-.
10. Compounds according to claim 8, wherein L denotes -C(O)NH-; the partial structure (i) is present and one of the groups R6, R7 or R8 has the partial structure (iii-a) or
R7 has the partial structure (iii-d).
11. Compounds according to claim 7, wherein a) where partial structure (i) is present
R7 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (ϋi-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (ϋi-f), (iii-g) or (iii-h),
R6 is selected from among hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl, -OCi-βalkyl, chlorine and fluorine and
R8 is selected from among hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl and -OCi_6alkyl; or R6 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), (iϋ-g) or (iii-h) and
R7 and R8 denote hydrogen; or
R8 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (ϋi-f), (iii-g) or (iii-h) and
R6 and R7 denote hydrogen; and b) where partial structure (ii) is present
R7 has the partial structure (iii-a), (iii-b), (iii-c), (iii-d), (iii-e), (iii-f), (ϋi-g) or (iii-h) and
R6 denotes hydrogen.
12. Compounds according to one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the partial structure (i) is present and
R7 has the partial structure (iv).
13. Compounds according to claim 12, wherein L denotes -NHC(O)-.
14. Compounds according to one of claims 12 or 13, wherein R6 and R8 each denote hydrogen.
15. Compounds according to one of claims 1 to 14, wherein
R10 and R13 are each selected independently from among Ral and -OCi_6alkyl; Ral denotes hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rbl and/or Rcl, selected from among Ci_6alkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl and 4-14 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl; each Rbl denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORcl, -NRclRcl, -C(O)Rcl, -C(O)NRclRcl, -NHC(O)Rcl as well as the bivalent substituent =0, while the latter may only be a substituent in non-aromatic ring systems; each Rcl denotes, independently of one another in each case, hydrogen or a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rdl and/or Rel, selected from among Ci-βalkyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl; each Rdl denotes the bivalent substituent =0, which may only be a substituent in non- aromatic ring systems; and each Rel is selected independently in each case from among hydrogen, Ci^alkyl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl; or the groups -NR9R10 and -NR12R13 altogether and independently of one another represent in each case a nitrogen-containing, 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl or 5-12 membered heteroaryl, in each case optionally substituted by one or more identical or different group(s) selected from among Ra2 and Rb2; each Ra2 denotes a group optionally substituted by one or more identical or different Rb2 and/or Rc2, selected from among d^alkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl, C4-i6cycloalkylalkyl, Cβ-ioaryl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, 6-18 membered heteroarylalkyl and 3-14 membered heterocycloalkyl; each Rb2 denotes a suitable substituent and is independently selected in each case from among -ORc2, -NRc2Rc2, halogen as well as the bivalent substituent =0, while the latter may only be a substituent in non-aromatic ring systems; each Rc2 is selected independently in each case from among hydrogen, Ci-βalkyl, C3_iocycloalkyl and 5-12 membered heteroaryl.
16. Compounds according to claim 15, wherein
R10 and R13 are selected independently in each case from among methyl; ethyl; allyl; 2-propyl; 2-hydroxyethyl; 2-aminoethyl; 2-methoxyethyl; 2,2-dimethoxyethyl; 2,3-dihydroxypropyl; 2-methylpropyl; cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl;l,l-dimethylethyl; methoxy; 2,2-dimethylpropyl;
Figure imgf000216_0001
or
the groups -NR9R10 and -NR12R13 in each case altogether and independently of one another denote
Figure imgf000217_0001
or
R13 denotes C1-6alkyl and
R11 and R12 together with the atoms to which they are bound form a heterocycloalkyl, selected from among
Figure imgf000218_0001
17. Compounds according to any of the preceding claims, namely
Figure imgf000218_0002
Figure imgf000219_0001
Figure imgf000220_0001
Figure imgf000221_0001
Figure imgf000222_0001
Figure imgf000223_0001
Figure imgf000224_0001
Figure imgf000225_0001
Figure imgf000226_0001
Figure imgf000227_0001
Figure imgf000228_0001
Figure imgf000229_0001
Figure imgf000230_0001
Figure imgf000231_0001
Figure imgf000232_0001
Figure imgf000233_0001
Figure imgf000234_0001
Figure imgf000235_0001
Figure imgf000236_0001
18. Compounds according to claims 1-16, namely
Figure imgf000236_0002
Figure imgf000237_0001
Figure imgf000238_0001
Figure imgf000239_0001
Figure imgf000240_0001
Figure imgf000241_0001
Figure imgf000242_0001
Figure imgf000243_0001
Figure imgf000244_0001
Figure imgf000245_0001
Figure imgf000246_0001
Figure imgf000247_0001
Figure imgf000248_0001
Figure imgf000249_0001
Figure imgf000250_0001
Figure imgf000251_0001
19. Compounds according to claims 1-16, namely
Figure imgf000251_0002
Figure imgf000252_0001
20. Compounds according to claims 1-16, namely
Figure imgf000252_0002
Figure imgf000253_0001
21. Compounds according to claims 1-16, namely
Figure imgf000253_0002
Figure imgf000254_0001
Figure imgf000255_0001
22. Compounds according to claims 1-16, namely
Figure imgf000255_0002
Figure imgf000256_0001
Figure imgf000257_0001
Figure imgf000258_0001
Figure imgf000259_0001
Figure imgf000260_0001
23. Compounds according to claims 1-16, namely
Figure imgf000260_0002
Figure imgf000261_0001
24. Compounds according to claims 1 to 23 as medicaments.
25. Pharmaceutical preparations, containing as active substance one or more compounds of general formula (1) according to claims 1 to 23, optionally in combination with conventional excipients and/or carriers.
26. Use of compounds according to claims 1 to 23 for preparing a medicament for the treatment and/or prevention of cancer, infections, inflammations and autoimmune diseases.
27. Pharmaceutical preparation comprising a compound according to claims 1 to 23 in combination with at least another different cytostatic or cytotoxic active substance, whereas the compounds according to claims 1 to 23 are optionally present in the form of the tautomers, the racemates, the enantiomers, the diastereomers, the mixtures thereof, the polymorphs thereof or as pharmacologically acceptable salts of all the above-mentioned forms.
PCT/EP2008/058433 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 Chemical compounds WO2009003999A2 (en)

Priority Applications (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EA201000105A EA201000105A1 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
EP08774579.0A EP2173734B1 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 Chemical compounds
MX2009013935A MX2009013935A (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 New chemical compounds.
CN200880105329A CN101796045A (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 New chemical compounds
BRPI0814601A BRPI0814601A2 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 chemical compounds
JP2010513966A JP5511658B2 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 New compounds
AU2008270300A AU2008270300A1 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 Chemical compounds
US12/665,769 US8889665B2 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 Chemical compounds
CA002692383A CA2692383A1 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 New chemical compounds
IL202625A IL202625A0 (en) 2007-07-02 2009-12-09 New chemical compounds
MA32465A MA32120B1 (en) 2007-07-02 2009-12-30 New chemical compounds
TNP2009000551A TN2009000551A1 (en) 2007-07-02 2009-12-31 NEW CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP07111566.1 2007-07-02
EP07111566 2007-07-02

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009003999A2 true WO2009003999A2 (en) 2009-01-08
WO2009003999A3 WO2009003999A3 (en) 2009-07-16

Family

ID=38792475

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2008/058433 WO2009003999A2 (en) 2007-07-02 2008-07-01 Chemical compounds

Country Status (21)

Country Link
US (1) US8889665B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2173734B1 (en)
JP (1) JP5511658B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20100039849A (en)
CN (1) CN101796045A (en)
AR (1) AR067397A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2008270300A1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0814601A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2692383A1 (en)
CL (1) CL2008001943A1 (en)
CO (1) CO6251316A2 (en)
EA (1) EA201000105A1 (en)
EC (1) ECSP099823A (en)
IL (1) IL202625A0 (en)
MA (1) MA32120B1 (en)
MX (1) MX2009013935A (en)
PE (1) PE20090837A1 (en)
TN (1) TN2009000551A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200911789A (en)
UY (1) UY31198A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2009003999A2 (en)

Cited By (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010094695A1 (en) 2009-02-17 2010-08-26 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrimido [5,4-d] pyrimidine derivatives for the inhibition of tyrosine kinases
JP2010235575A (en) * 2009-03-09 2010-10-21 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Method of producing nitrogen-containing condensed heterocyclic compound
WO2010127754A1 (en) * 2009-05-05 2010-11-11 Merck Patent Gmbh 3-([1,2,3]triazole-4-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine derivates
WO2011117381A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh B-raf kinase inhibitors
WO2011117382A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyridyltriazoles
US8198308B2 (en) 2006-07-07 2012-06-12 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Chemical compounds
US8546443B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2013-10-01 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Benzylic oxindole pyrimidines
US8653087B2 (en) 2008-09-08 2014-02-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrido [5, 4-D] pyrimidines as cell proliferation inhibitors
US8710055B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Triazolylphenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
US8778929B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2014-07-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Substituted heteroaryl inhibitors of B-RAF
US8889665B2 (en) 2007-07-02 2014-11-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Chemical compounds
US8889684B2 (en) 2011-02-02 2014-11-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Azaindolylphenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
WO2015148373A2 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA KINASE INHIBITORS, COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS THEREOF
WO2015148344A2 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Trka kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
US9156837B2 (en) 2011-07-29 2015-10-13 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound
KR101723881B1 (en) * 2016-03-28 2017-04-07 이화여자대학교 산학협력단 Novel triazole derivatives, preparation method thereof, and pharmaceutical composition for use in preventing or treating Aurora Kinase relating diseases containing the same as an active ingredient
US9914736B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-03-13 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrKA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
US10556900B2 (en) 2015-04-08 2020-02-11 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009003998A2 (en) * 2007-07-02 2009-01-08 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Antiproliferative compounds based on 5-membered heterocycles
CN103172617A (en) * 2011-12-20 2013-06-26 天津市国际生物医药联合研究院 Application of 1,5-2 substituent-1,2,3-triazole trifluoromethyl compound
CN103539784B (en) * 2012-07-09 2016-08-17 中国科学院广州生物医药与健康研究院 Heterocycle benzamide compound, Pharmaceutical composition and application thereof
CA2986083A1 (en) 2015-06-11 2016-12-15 Basilea Pharmaceutica International AG Efflux-pump inhibitors and therapeutic uses thereof
EP3817811B1 (en) * 2018-07-04 2024-04-03 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Triazole benzamide derivatives as gpr142 agonists
CN116761801A (en) * 2021-03-12 2023-09-15 四川科伦博泰生物医药股份有限公司 Heterocyclic compounds having protein kinase inhibitory activity, pharmaceutical compositions containing the same, and methods of preparing and using the same
WO2023205703A2 (en) * 2022-04-19 2023-10-26 Watershed Medical, Inc. Formulation for treating urinary system disorders
CN114805334B (en) * 2022-05-24 2023-06-09 深圳大学 QC and GSK-3 beta multi-targeting inhibitor and preparation method and application thereof

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005056535A1 (en) * 2003-12-03 2005-06-23 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,3-triazole amide derivatives as inhibitors of cytokine production
WO2005090333A1 (en) * 2004-03-09 2005-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-‘4-heterocyclyl -1,2,3,-triazol-1-yl!-n-aryl-benzamides as inhibitors of the cytokines production for the treatment of chronic inflammatory diseases
WO2005115991A1 (en) * 2004-05-12 2005-12-08 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-cytokine heterocyclic compounds
US20060100204A1 (en) * 2004-11-10 2006-05-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-cytokine heterocyclic compounds
WO2007121390A1 (en) * 2006-04-18 2007-10-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for making cytokine inhibiting compounds containing 4- and 5- imidazolyl rings and the intermediates thereof

Family Cites Families (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU507066B1 (en) 1977-09-06 1980-01-31 Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited 2-Substituted-5-Hydroxy-1h-Imidazole 4-Carbozamide Derivatives
JPH03174153A (en) 1989-09-20 1991-07-29 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Color image forming method
CN1151147C (en) * 1995-02-02 2004-05-26 史密丝克莱恩比彻姆有限公司 Indole derivatives as 5 -HT receptor antagonist
WO1997003967A1 (en) 1995-07-22 1997-02-06 Rhone-Poulenc Rorer Limited Substituted aromatic compounds and their pharmaceutical use
WO2000047194A2 (en) * 1999-02-09 2000-08-17 3-Dimensional Pharmaceuticals, Inc. METHODS OF TREATING C1s-MEDIATED DISEASES AND CONDITIONS, AND COMPOUNDS AND COMPOSITIONS THEREFOR
UA71971C2 (en) 1999-06-04 2005-01-17 Agoron Pharmaceuticals Inc Diaminothiazoles, composition based thereon, a method for modulation of protein kinases activity, a method for the treatment of diseases mediated by protein kinases
US6531478B2 (en) 2000-02-24 2003-03-11 Cheryl P. Kordik Amino pyrazole derivatives useful for the treatment of obesity and other disorders
JP2002069070A (en) * 2000-04-07 2002-03-08 Takeda Chem Ind Ltd Heterocyclic compound, preparative method and use of the same
CA2437248A1 (en) 2001-02-02 2002-08-15 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Jnk inhibitor
CA2465207C (en) 2001-11-01 2011-01-04 Icagen, Inc. Pyrazole-amides and -sulfonamides
US20040010027A1 (en) 2001-12-17 2004-01-15 Pharmacia & Upjohn Spa Hydroxphenyl-pyrazole derivatives active as kinase inhibitors, process for their preparation and pharmaceutical comositions comprising them
JP2005162612A (en) 2002-01-09 2005-06-23 Ajinomoto Co Inc Acylsulfonamide derivative
ATE329909T1 (en) * 2002-11-27 2006-07-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma 1,2,3-TRIAZOLAMIDE DERIVATIVES AS CYTOKIN INHIBITORS
JP4895811B2 (en) 2003-09-11 2012-03-14 ケミア，インコーポレイテッド Cytokine inhibitor
EP1663953A1 (en) 2003-09-24 2006-06-07 Methylgene, Inc. Inhibitors of histone deacetylase
WO2005040152A1 (en) 2003-10-20 2005-05-06 E.I. Dupont De Nemours And Company Heteroyclylphenyl-and heterocyclylpyridyl-substituted azolecarboxamides as herbicides
AU2005304393B2 (en) 2004-11-10 2012-09-27 Synta Pharmaceuticals Corp. IL-12 modulatory compounds
PL1858877T3 (en) * 2005-01-14 2014-08-29 Gilead Connecticut Inc 1,3 substituted diaryl ureas as modulators of kinase activity
JP2007076376A (en) * 2005-09-09 2007-03-29 Yanmar Co Ltd Tractor
WO2007056016A2 (en) 2005-11-02 2007-05-18 Kemia, Inc. Bisamide cytokine inhibitors
WO2007075896A2 (en) 2005-12-22 2007-07-05 Kemia, Inc. Heterocyclic cytokine inhibitors
WO2007076474A1 (en) 2005-12-23 2007-07-05 Kalypsys, Inc. Novel substituted pyridinyloxy and pyrimidinyloxy amides useful as inhibitors of protein kinases
PE20080068A1 (en) 2006-05-15 2008-03-17 Boehringer Ingelheim Int COMPOUNDS DERIVED FROM PYRIMIDINE AS INHIBITORS OF KINASE AURORA
US8030487B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2011-10-04 Targegen, Inc. 2-amino—5-substituted pyrimidine inhibitors
WO2008005570A1 (en) * 2006-07-07 2008-01-10 Schering Corporation 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands
JP5185930B2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2013-04-17 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Pyrrolotriazine kinase inhibitor
UA95298C2 (en) * 2006-07-07 2011-07-25 Бьёрингер Ингельхайм Интернациональ Гмбх Phenyl substituted heteroaryl-derivatives and use thereof as anti-tumor agents
PE20080906A1 (en) 2006-08-17 2008-07-05 Kemia Inc HETEROARYL DERIVATIVES AS CYTOKINE INHIBITORS
WO2008079909A1 (en) 2006-12-21 2008-07-03 Plexxikon, Inc. Pyrrolo [2,3-b] pyridines as kinase modulators
WO2008089034A2 (en) 2007-01-11 2008-07-24 Kemia, Inc. Cytokine inhibitors
BRPI0808523A2 (en) 2007-03-01 2014-08-19 Novartis Vaccines & Diagnostic PIM KINASE INHIBITORS AND METHODS OF USE
WO2009003998A2 (en) 2007-07-02 2009-01-08 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Antiproliferative compounds based on 5-membered heterocycles
CL2008001943A1 (en) 2007-07-02 2009-09-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Compounds derived from phenyl-triazole, inhibitors of specific signal enzymes that participate in the control of cell proliferation; pharmaceutical composition comprising said compounds; and its use to treat cancer, infections, inflammatory and autoimmune diseases.
US20100190777A1 (en) 2007-07-17 2010-07-29 Plexxikon Inc. Compounds and methods for kinase modulation, and indications therefor
MX2011000738A (en) 2008-07-24 2011-02-23 Nerviano Medical Sciences Srl 3,4-diarylpyrazoles as protein kinase inhibitors.
AR073501A1 (en) * 2008-09-08 2010-11-10 Boehringer Ingelheim Int PYRIMID DERIVATIVES [5,4-D] PYRIMIDINE INHIBITORS OF THYROSINOQUINASE
BRPI0920608A2 (en) 2008-09-29 2019-09-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Int chemical compounds
WO2010094695A1 (en) 2009-02-17 2010-08-26 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrimido [5,4-d] pyrimidine derivatives for the inhibition of tyrosine kinases
WO2011117382A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyridyltriazoles
WO2011117381A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh B-raf kinase inhibitors
US8710055B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Triazolylphenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
US20130023531A1 (en) 2011-01-27 2013-01-24 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrimido[5,4-d]pyrimidylamino phenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
US8889684B2 (en) 2011-02-02 2014-11-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Azaindolylphenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005056535A1 (en) * 2003-12-03 2005-06-23 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,3-triazole amide derivatives as inhibitors of cytokine production
WO2005090333A1 (en) * 2004-03-09 2005-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-‘4-heterocyclyl -1,2,3,-triazol-1-yl!-n-aryl-benzamides as inhibitors of the cytokines production for the treatment of chronic inflammatory diseases
WO2005115991A1 (en) * 2004-05-12 2005-12-08 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-cytokine heterocyclic compounds
US20060100204A1 (en) * 2004-11-10 2006-05-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-cytokine heterocyclic compounds
WO2007121390A1 (en) * 2006-04-18 2007-10-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for making cytokine inhibiting compounds containing 4- and 5- imidazolyl rings and the intermediates thereof

Cited By (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8198308B2 (en) 2006-07-07 2012-06-12 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Chemical compounds
US8889665B2 (en) 2007-07-02 2014-11-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Chemical compounds
US8653087B2 (en) 2008-09-08 2014-02-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrido [5, 4-D] pyrimidines as cell proliferation inhibitors
US8778929B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2014-07-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Substituted heteroaryl inhibitors of B-RAF
WO2010094695A1 (en) 2009-02-17 2010-08-26 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrimido [5,4-d] pyrimidine derivatives for the inhibition of tyrosine kinases
US8569316B2 (en) 2009-02-17 2013-10-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrimido [5,4-D] pyrimidine derivatives for the inhibition of tyrosine kinases
JP2010235575A (en) * 2009-03-09 2010-10-21 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Method of producing nitrogen-containing condensed heterocyclic compound
US8541584B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2013-09-24 Merck Patent Gmbh 3-(1,2,3-triazol-4-yl) pyrrolo [2,3-b] pyridine derivatives
JP2012526057A (en) * 2009-05-05 2012-10-25 メルク パテント ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング 3- (1,2,3-Triazol-4-yl) pyrrolo [2,3-b] pyridine derivative
WO2010127754A1 (en) * 2009-05-05 2010-11-11 Merck Patent Gmbh 3-([1,2,3]triazole-4-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine derivates
AU2010244772B2 (en) * 2009-05-05 2016-01-07 Merck Patent Gmbh 3-([1,2,3]Triazol-4-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine derivates
WO2011117382A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyridyltriazoles
WO2011117381A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh B-raf kinase inhibitors
US8865703B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2014-10-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyridyltriazoles
US9290507B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2016-03-22 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh B-RAF kinase inhibitors
US8710055B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Triazolylphenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
US8546443B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2013-10-01 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Benzylic oxindole pyrimidines
US8889684B2 (en) 2011-02-02 2014-11-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Azaindolylphenyl sulfonamides as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
US9156837B2 (en) 2011-07-29 2015-10-13 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Heterocyclic compound
WO2015148344A2 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Trka kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
WO2015148354A2 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA KINASE INHIBITORS, COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS THEREOF
WO2015148373A2 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA KINASE INHIBITORS, COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS THEREOF
US9815846B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2017-11-14 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
US9862716B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-01-09 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TRKA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
US9862707B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-01-09 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
US9914736B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-03-13 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrKA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
US10556900B2 (en) 2015-04-08 2020-02-11 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. TrkA kinase inhibitors, compositions and methods thereof
KR101723881B1 (en) * 2016-03-28 2017-04-07 이화여자대학교 산학협력단 Novel triazole derivatives, preparation method thereof, and pharmaceutical composition for use in preventing or treating Aurora Kinase relating diseases containing the same as an active ingredient

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2173734B1 (en) 2016-03-23
CA2692383A1 (en) 2009-01-08
AR067397A1 (en) 2009-10-07
IL202625A0 (en) 2010-06-30
US8889665B2 (en) 2014-11-18
AU2008270300A1 (en) 2009-01-08
CO6251316A2 (en) 2011-02-21
CL2008001943A1 (en) 2009-09-11
EP2173734A2 (en) 2010-04-14
CN101796045A (en) 2010-08-04
EA201000105A1 (en) 2010-06-30
MX2009013935A (en) 2010-01-28
UY31198A1 (en) 2009-01-30
WO2009003999A3 (en) 2009-07-16
JP2010531851A (en) 2010-09-30
ECSP099823A (en) 2010-01-29
TW200911789A (en) 2009-03-16
TN2009000551A1 (en) 2011-03-31
PE20090837A1 (en) 2009-07-24
JP5511658B2 (en) 2014-06-04
KR20100039849A (en) 2010-04-16
BRPI0814601A2 (en) 2019-09-24
MA32120B1 (en) 2011-03-01
US20110183952A1 (en) 2011-07-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2173734A2 (en) Chemical compounds
US8198308B2 (en) Chemical compounds
US20100240657A1 (en) Chemical compounds
US20100210644A1 (en) Chemical compounds
EP2321299A2 (en) Pyridons as pdk1 inhibitors
CA2752265A1 (en) Pyrimido [5,4-d] pyrimidine derivatives for the inhibition of tyrosine kinases
EP2181108A2 (en) 3-hetrocyclylidene-indolinone derivatives as inhibitors of specific cell cycle kinases
US20120270859A1 (en) Indoline derivatives and their use in treating disease-states such as cancer
US20110263565A1 (en) Compounds
CA2683016A1 (en) 9h- purine derivatives and their use in the treatment of proliferative diseases
US8203001B2 (en) Chemical compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880105329.7

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08774579

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2009/013935

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2009121913

Country of ref document: EG

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 09148258

Country of ref document: CO

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2692383

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2010513966

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: 12010500015

Country of ref document: PH

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 582641

Country of ref document: NZ

Ref document number: 2008270300

Country of ref document: AU

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20107001120

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 468/DELNP/2010

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201000105

Country of ref document: EA

Ref document number: DZP2010000063

Country of ref document: DZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008774579

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: A201000940

Country of ref document: UA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2008270300

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20080701

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PI 20095666

Country of ref document: MY

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12665769

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0814601

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20100104